Queensland TransportOperations (Road Use Management) Act 1995 TransportOperations (RoadUse Management—Road Rules)Regulation 2009Current as at 7 April 2014
Information about this reprintThisreprint shows the legislation current as at the date on the coverand is authorised by the Parliamentary Counsel. Anew reprint ofthe legislation willbe prepared bythe Office ofthe Queensland ParliamentaryCounsel when any change to the legislation takes effect. Thischange may be because a provision of the originallegislation, or an amendment to it, commences orbecause a particular provision of thelegislation expires or is repealed. When a new reprintis prepared, this reprint will become a historical reprint. Also,if it is necessary to replace this reprint before anew reprint is prepared, for example, to includeamendments with a retrospective commencement,an appropriate note would be included onthe cover ofthe replacement reprintand on thecopy of thisreprint atwww.legislation.qld.gov.au.Theendnotes to this reprint contain detailed information about thelegislation and reprint. For example— •Thetable of reprints endnote lists any previous reprints and, for this reprint, gives details of any discretionary editorial powers under the Reprints Act 1992 used by the Office of the Queensland Parliamentary Counsel in preparing it. •The list oflegislation endnotegives historicalinformation aboutthe original legislation andthe legislation whichamended it.It also givesdetails ofuncommenced amendmentsto this legislation. Forinformation aboutpossible amendments to thelegislation by Bills introduced in Parliament, see theQueensland Legislation CurrentAnnotations atwww.legislation.qld.gov.au/Leg_Info/information.htm. •Thelist of annotations endnote gives historical information at sectionlevel. All Queensland reprints are dated andauthorised by the Parliamentary Counsel. The previous numberingsystem and distinctions between printed and electronic reprintsare not continued.
Queensland TransportOperations (Road Use Management—Road Rules) Regulation2009 Contents Part 1Division 1 12 3 Division 24 5 67–10 Part 2 Division 111 12 13Division 2 1415 16 1718 19 Part 320 Page Introductory GeneralShort title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Commencement . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Somefeatures ofthis regulation Definitions. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Compliancewith standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Section numbers not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Applicationof thisregulation Roads and road-related areas Regulationapplies tovehicles androad userson roadsand road-relatedareas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 21 Section number not used . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Whatis a road-related area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 22 Road users and vehiclesRoadusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 23 What is a vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Who is a driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23Who is a rider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Pedestrianincludes personal mobilitydevice user. . . . . . . . . . . .24Referenceto driverincludes rider etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Speed limits Obeyingthe speedlimit .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents 2122 23 2424A 25 Part 4Division 1 2627 28 29Division 2 3031 32 33Division 3 3435 36 Division 437 38 3940 41 4243 Part 5 Division 144 45 46Speed limit where a speed limit sign applies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed limit in aspeed limited area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Speed limit in a school zone. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed limit in ashared zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Speed limit for certain vehicles. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed limit elsewhere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Making turns Leftturns Application ofdivision toroundabouts, road-related areas andadjacent land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Starting a left turn from a road (except amulti-lane road) . . . . . . Starting a leftturn from a multi-lane road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Making a left turn as indicated by a turnline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rightturns Applicationof divisionto certainright turns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Startinga rightturn froma road(excepta multi-lane road) . . . . .Starting a right turn from a multi-lane road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Makinga rightturn .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hook turns at intersections Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Optional hook turn by a bicycle rider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bicycle rider making a hook turn contraryto nohook turnby bicycles sign .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . U-turns Beginning aU-turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . Giving way when making a U-turn . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making a U-turncontrary to a no U-turn sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Making a U-turn at an intersectionwith trafficlights. .. . . . . . . . . Makinga U-turn at an intersectionwithout traffic lights. . . . . . . .Starting a U-turn at an intersection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sectionnumber notused .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Change of direction and stop signals Changeof directionsignals Division doesnot applyto enteringor leavinga roundabout. . . .What is changing direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Givinga leftchange ofdirection signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2526 27 282929 30 3133 35353739404244 45 4545 46474748484850Page2
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents47 48 4950 51 Division 252 53 5455 Part 6 Division 156 57 5859 60 60A61 Division 2 6263 64 65Division 3 66Part7 Division 1 6768 How to give a left change of directionsignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving a rightchange of direction signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. How to give a right change of directionsignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to give aright change of direction signal by giving a handsignal . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. When use of direction indicator lightspermitted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopsignals Division does not apply to bicycle riders orcertain tram drivers . Giving a stop signal . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .How to give a stop signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .How to give a stop signal by giving a hand signal . . . . . . . . . . . .Traffic lights, trafficarrows andtwin redlights Obeying trafficlights andtraffic arrows Stoppingon a red traffic light or arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stopping for a yellow trafficlight orarrow. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exceptionsto stoppingfor ared oryellow traffic light.. . . . . . . . . Proceedingthrough ared trafficlight .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proceedingthrough ared trafficarrow .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Proceedingthrough abicycle storage area before a red trafficlight or arrow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Proceeding when traffic lights or arrows atan intersection change to red or yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Giving way at traffic lightsand trafficarrows Giving way when turning at intersectionwith trafficlights .. . . . . Givingway atan intersection withtraffic lights not operating oronly partly operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Givingway ata flashingyellow traffic arrowat anintersection. . .Giving way at a marked foot crossing (exceptat an intersection) with a flashing yellow trafficlight .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Twin red lights (except at level crossings) Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossings). . . . . . . . . Giving way Giving way at astop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to the driverStopping and giving way at a stop sign orstop line at an intersectionwithout traffic lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at otherplaces........................................ 50 5051 52 5253 53 53 54555759596060 6162646565666769Page 3
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents 6969A 70 71Division 2 7273 Division 3 7475 Division 4 7677 78 7979A Division 5 8081 82 83Division 6 8485 86 87Part8 Division 1 88Page4 Giving way at a give way sign or give wayline at an intersection, other than a roundabout . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Twoor more drivers facing various signs or lines at anintersection ....................................Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge orlength of narrow road .........................................Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at other places. . . Giving way at an intersectionwithout traffic lightsor a stop sign,stop line,give waysign orgive wayline Giving way at an intersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Giving way at a T-intersection. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Entering or leaving road-related areas and adjacent landGiving way when entering a road from a road-related area or adjacentland .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Givingway whenentering aroad-relatedarea oradjacent land froma road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keeping clear of and giving way to particular vehicles Keeping clearof tramstravelling intram lanesetc. .. . . . . . . . . .Giving way to buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keeping clear of police and emergencyvehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving way to police and emergencyvehicles .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Giving way to escorted vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Crossingsand sharedzones Stopping at a children’s crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Givingway ata pedestriancrossing. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overtakingor passinga vehicleat a children’s crossing orpedestrian crossing . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving way topedestrians in a shared zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Other give way rules Giving way whendriving through a break in a dividing strip. . . . .Giving way on a painted island. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving way in median turning bays.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Givingway whenmoving froma sideof a road or a median strip parking area . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Traffic signs and road markingsTraffic signs and road markings atintersections and other places Leftturn signs.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 7173 73 74 75808586878889 8990909294 95 9597 9899 100
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents89 90 9192 Division 2 9394 95 9697 98 99100 101 101ADivision 3 102103 104 105106 107 108Part9 109 110 111112 113 114115 116 Right turn signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . No turns signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No left turn andno right turn signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Traffic lane arrows . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic signs androad markings generally Noovertaking or passing signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noovertaking on bridge signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Emergencystopping lane only signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keepclear markings. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Road accesssigns .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. One-way signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keep left and keep right signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .No entry signs. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Hand-held stop signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Safety ramp and arrester bedsigns .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Signs for trucks,buses andother largevehicles Clearance andlow clearance signs. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Load limit signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notrucks signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trucksmust entersigns .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. No buses signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Buses must enter signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trucksand buseslow gearsigns .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Roundabouts What is a roundabout. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Meaning of halfway around a roundabout .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Entering a roundabout froma multi-lane road or a road with 2ormore lines of traffic travelling in the same direction . . . . . .. . . Giving a left change of direction signalwhen entering a roundabout ..................................... Givinga rightchange ofdirection signal whenentering a roundabout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Giving way when entering ordriving ina roundabout . . . . . . . . . Drivingin aroundabout to the left of the centraltraffic island . . .Obeying traffic lanearrows whendriving inor leavinga roundabout ..................................... 101 101102 103 104 105106107108109110111111112113113114116116117118119119119 125125126126127Page 5
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents 117118 119 Part 10120 121 122123 124 Part 11Division 1 125126 127 128128A Division 2 129130 131 132133 134 135136 137 138139 139A Division 3140 141 142Giving a change of direction signal whenchanging marked lanes or lines of traffic in a roundabout .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving a leftchange of direction signal when leaving a roundabout ....................................Giving way by the rider of a bicycle oranimal to a vehicle leaving a roundabout . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level crossings What is a level crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoppingand givingway ata stopsign ata levelcrossing. .. .. .Giving way at a give way sign or give wayline at a level crossing Enteringa levelcrossing when a train or tram is approaching etc.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . Leaving a level crossing . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keeping left,overtaking and other driving rules GeneralUnreasonably obstructing drivers orpedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keeping a safe distancebehind vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keeping a minimum distance betweenlong vehicles . . . . . . . . . . Enteringblocked intersections .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Enteringparticular blocked crossings.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Keeping to the leftKeeping to the far left side of a road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keeping to the left on a multi-lane road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keeping to the left of oncoming vehicles. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Keeping to the left of the centre of a road or the dividing line. .. Exceptions tokeeping tothe leftof thecentre ofa road. .. .. .. Exceptions tokeeping tothe leftof adividing line . . . . . . . . . . . . Keepingto theleft ofa medianstrip .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Driving on a one-way service road. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Keeping off a dividing strip. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Keeping off a painted island. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Exceptions foravoiding obstructions ona road. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Exceptionsfor passingbicycle rider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Overtaking No overtakingunless safeto doso .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .No overtaking etc.to theleft ofa vehicle. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. No overtakingto theright ofa vehicleturning right etc. . . . . . . . .127 128 128128129130 130 131131 132132132133133133135137140141143144145145147148149149150Page6
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents143 144 144A145 Division 4 146147 148 148A149 150 151Division 5 152Division 6 153154 155 155A156 157 158159 Division 7 160161 162 163164 164AA Passing orovertaking a vehicle displaying a do not overtaketurning vehicle sign. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keeping a safedistance when overtaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Keeping a safe lateral distance when passingbicycle rider Driver being overtaken not to increase speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving in markedlanes or lines of traffic Drivingwithin asingle marked laneor lineof traffic. .. .. .. .. .. Moving from1 markedlane toanother marked laneacross a continuous line separating the lanes .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Giving way whenmoving from 1 marked lane or line of traffic to another markedlane orline oftraffic .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Giving way when movingwithin asingle marked lane. .. .. .. .. Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic Driving on or across a continuouswhite edgeline .. .. .. .. .. .. Riding amotorbike or bicycle alongside more than 1 other rider .Obeying overhead lanecontrol devices applyingto marked lanes Complying withoverhead lane control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Driving in marked lanes designated forspecial purposes Bicycle lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Buslanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . Tramlanes .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Tramways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Transit lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Truck lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exceptionsto drivingin specialpurpose lanes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . Markedlanes required tobe usedby particular kindsof vehicles Passing tramsand safetyzones Passing or overtaking atram thatis notat ornear theleft sideof the road . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . Passing or overtaking a tram at or near theleft side of a road. . . Driving past a safety zone . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving past therear of a stopped tram at a tram stop . . . . . . . . .Stopping beside a stopped tram at a tramstop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Staying stoppedif atram comesfrom behinda stoppeddriver and stops . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 151 152 152153 154155 156158158158160 160 162163 164165167168169170171 172 172173 174 175Page 7
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents Part 12Division 1 164A165 166 Division 2167 168 169Division 3 170171 172 173174 175 Division 4176 177 178Division 5 179180 181 182183 184 185186 Division 6 187188 Page 8 Restrictions onstopping and parking General Minor trafficoffences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . Stopping in an emergency etc. or to complywith another provision ......................................Application of part to bicycles. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No stopping andparking signs and road markings No stoppingsigns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . No parking signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No stoppingon aroad witha yellowedge line. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping atintersections and crossings Stopping inor nearan intersection. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingon ornear achildren’scrossing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping onor neara pedestrian crossing(exceptat an intersection) . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stopping on or near a marked foot crossing(except at an intersection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoppingon ornear abicycle crossing (except at an intersection) 184 Stoppingon ornear alevel crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoppingon clearways andfreeways and in emergency stopping lanes Stoppingon aclearway .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ona freeway. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping in anemergency stopping lane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Stopping in zones for particularvehicles Stoppingin aloading zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoppingin atruck zone. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingin aworks zone. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ina taxizone .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingin abus zone. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Section numbernot used. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ina permitzone. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ina mailzone .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Other placeswhere stopping isrestricted Stopping ina buslane, tramlane, tramway, transitlane, truck lane or on tram tracks. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stopping in a shared zone . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176176 177 177178 179179181182 183185186187188 188190190191192192192193194 194
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents189 190 191192 193 194195 196 197198 199 200201 202 203203A Division 7 204205 205A 206207 Division 8 208208A 209 Division 9210 Division 10 211212 213 213ADouble parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping in ornear a safety zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Stopping near an obstruction . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping on abridge or in a tunnel etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Stopping on a crest or curve outside abuilt-up area . . . . . . . . . . Stopping neara firehydrant etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stoppingat ornear abus stop. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ator neara tramstop .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ona path,dividing strip, naturestrip orpainted island .Obstructingaccess toand froma footpath,driveway etc. . . . . . . Stoppingnear apostbox. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingon roads—heavyand longvehicles .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingon aroad withbicycle parking sign. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingon aroad withmotorbike parking sign. .. .. .. .. .. .. Stopping ina parkingarea forpeople withdisabilities . . . . . . . . . Stoppingin aslip lane. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Permissive parkingsigns andparking fees Meaningof particular information onor withpermissive parking signs..........................................Parking for longer than indicated . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking outsidetimes indicated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Time extension for people with disabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section numbernot used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . Parallelparking Parallel parkingon aroad (except in a median stripparking area).........................................Parallel parking in a road-related area(except in a median strip parkingarea) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Parallel parkingin amedian strip parkingarea .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Angle parking Angle parking. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Otherparking related rules Parkingin parkingbays .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Entering andleaving amedian strip parkingarea .. .. .. .. .. .. Making a motor vehiclesecure. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Evidentiary provision .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 195196 197 197198 199200201201202203203204205205207207 210 210211 211 211214215215221222223224Page 9
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents Part 13Division 1 214215 216 217218 219 220221 222 222ADivision 2 223Division 3 224225 Division 4 226227 Division 5 227A227B Part 14 Division 1228 229 230231 232 233234 Page 10 Lights andwarning devices Lights on vehicles (except bicycles, animalsand animal-drawn vehicles) Division doesnot apply to riders of bicycles, animals or animal-drawnvehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . Using lights when driving at night or inhazardous weather conditions ......................................Towing a vehicle at night or in hazardous weatherconditions . . . Usingfog lights. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Using headlightson high-beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lights not to be used to dazzle other roadusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using lightson vehiclesthat arestopped .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Using hazard warninglights .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .School bus not to be driven withoutwarning lights and warning signs. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . Use of warning lights—picking up or settingdown school children.......................................Lights on animal-drawn vehicles Using lightswhen ridingan animal-drawnvehicle atnight orin hazardous weatherconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hornsand radardetectors Using hornsand similarwarning devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Using radar detectors and similar devices .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Portable warningtriangles for heavy vehicles Heavy vehiclesto beequipped with portablewarning triangles. .Using portable warningtriangles .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Signs for oversizevehicles Do not overtake turningvehicle signs for long vehicles. .. .. .. .Warning sign not to be displayed ifnot required bylaw .. .. .. .. Rules for pedestrians General No pedestriansigns .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Pedestrianson aroad witha roadaccess sign. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Crossinga road—general. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Crossinga roadat pedestrian lights.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Crossinga roadat trafficlights .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Crossinga roadto orfrom atram .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Crossing a road on or near a crossing for pedestrians.. .. .. .. .225 225226227228228 229229230 230231232232 233233235235235236236237238239240
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents235 235A 236237 238 239Division 2 240240A 241 242243 244 244A244B Division 3 244C244D 244E 244F244G 244H 244I244J 244K 244L244M 244N 244O244P Crossing a level crossing . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Crossing a pedestrian level crossing thathas a red pedestrian light . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard orobstruction . . . . . . . Getting on or into a moving vehicle .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pedestrianstravelling along a road (except if using a wheeledrecreationaldevice, wheeled toyor personalmobility device) . . .Pedestrianson abicycle path or separated footpath. .. .. .. .. .Rulesfor persons travelling in or on wheeled recreationaldevices and wheeledtoys Wheeled recreational devices andtoys notto beused on certainroads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nowheeled recreational devices or toys sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Travellingin oron awheeled recreational deviceor toyon aroad.........................................Travellingin oron awheeled recreational deviceor toyon afootpathor sharedpath .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Travelling onrollerblades etc. on a bicycle path or separated footpath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheeledrecreational devices or wheeled toysbeing towedetc. . Sectionnumber notused .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Wearing of helmets by users of motorisedscooters. .. .. .. .. .. Additional rulesfor using personal mobility devices Application ofpt 14,div 3. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Age restrictionsfor PMDuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speedlimit fordevice .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. PMD user to wear helmet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PMD user travellingalong aroad .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .No personal mobilitydevices sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usinga deviceon afootpath orshared path. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Carryingpeople ondevice .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Travelling tothe leftof oncomingPMD usersor riderson apath . Warningequipment on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Usingdevice atnight .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Bicycle crossinglights provisions alsoapply toPMD user. .. .. .Using mobile phoneson device. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Drinkingliquor while usingdevice .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 241243 243 244245246249249250250252253253253254254254255255256256256257257257257258258Page11
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents Part 15245 246 247247A 247B 248249 250 251252 253 254255 256 257258 259 260261 262 Part 16263 264 265266 267 268269 270 271272 Additional rules for bicycleriders Riding a bicycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carrying peopleon a bicycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Riding in a bicycle lane on a road . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering abicycle storage area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Giving way while entering orin abicycle storage area.. .. .. .. .No riding acrossa roadon particular crossings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Riding on a separatedfootpath .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Riding on a footpath or shared path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Riding to the left of oncoming bicycleriders ordevice users on a path .........................................Nobicycles signs and markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . Bicycle riders not to cause a traffichazard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bicycles beingtowed etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Riding too close to the rear of a motorvehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bicycle helmets. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Riding with a person on a bicycle trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipmenton abicycle .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Riding at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stoppingfor ared bicyclecrossing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stoppingfor ayellow bicycle crossinglight .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Proceedingwhen bicycle crossinglights change to yellow or red Rulesfor personstravelling in or on vehiclesApplicationof partto personsin oron trams. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Wearing of seatbeltsby drivers. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Wearing of seatbeltsby passengers 16years oldor older.. .. .. Wearing of seatbelts bypassengers under 16 years old . . . . . . . Exemptionsfrom wearing seatbelts. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. How personsmust travelin oron amotor vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . Openingdoors andgetting outof avehicle etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wearingmotorbike helmets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Riding on motorbikes. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Interferingwith thedriver’scontrol ofthe vehicleetc... .. .. .. .. 258259 259 259260260261262262 262 264264 264 264 265266267267268268269270270271275277279279280281Page12
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 ContentsPart17 Division 1 273274 275 276277 278 279Division 2 280281 282 283284 285 286Part18 Division 1 287288 289 290291 292 293293A 293B 294295 296 297Additional rules for drivers of trams, tramrecovery vehicles and buses TramsDivision also applies to tram recoveryvehicles and buses travelling along tram tracks. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stopping for ared T light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . Stoppingfor ayellow Tlight .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Exception to stopping for a red or yellow Tlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proceeding afterstopping for a red or yellow T light . . . . . . . . . .Proceedingwhen ared trafficlight anda whiteT lightor white traffic arrow is showing . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Proceeding when a white T light or whitetraffic arrow is no longer showing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Buses, taxis and bicycles Application ofdivision. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stoppingfor ared Blight .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Stopping for a yellow B light . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exception tostopping for a red or yellow B light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Proceedingafter stopping fora redor yellowB light. .. .. .. .. .Proceedingwhen ared trafficlight anda whiteB lightor white traffic arrow is showing . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Proceeding when a white B light or whitetraffic arrow is no longer showing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Miscellaneousroad rules Miscellaneous rulesfor drivers Duties of a driver involved ina crash. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Driving on a path . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driving on a nature strip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drivingon atraffic island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Making unnecessary noiseor smoke. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Section number not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Removingfallen etc.things fromthe road. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Oil and grease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restriction ondriving orstopping vehicle on road . . . . . . . . . . . . Keepingcontrol ofa vehiclebeing towed. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Motor vehicletowing another vehiclewith atowline .. .. .. .. .. .Driving a vehicle in reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Driverto haveproper control of a vehicle etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 282 282 283 283283 284285285286 286286287 287288290 291291292293293293294294295296296Page 13
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents 298299 300 300A300C 300D Division 2301 301A 301B302 303 303ADivision 2A 303BDivision 3 304Part19 305 306 307308 308A 309310 311 312313 313A 313BPart20 Division 1 314315 Page 14 Driving with aperson in a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 297 Television receivers and visualdisplay units in motor vehicles . .297 Use of mobile phones. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Drinking liquor while driving . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 Limitation on use of wheeledrecreational device or wheeled toy 299Driver must not damage railinfrastructure or obstructlevel crossing 299Rules for people in charge of animalsLeading an animal while in or on a vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Harnessingan animaldrawing avehicle .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .300Riding an animal on a road-relatedarea whenpossible .. .. .. .301Rider of an animal on a footpath or nature strip to give way to pedestrians. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Riding an animal alongside more than 1other rider. . . . . . . . . . . 301Giving way to restive horses. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Rulesfor people in charge of animal-drawn vehicles Brakes . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 302 Obeyingdirections Direction bypolice officer or traffic controller. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .302Exemptions Exemption fordrivers ofpolice vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Exemptionsfor driversof emergency vehicles. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 304 Stoppingand parkingexemption for police and emergency vehicles. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 304 Exemption for police officers andemergency workers on foot . . . 304Exemption for police officers using personalmobility devices . . . 305 Exemptions fordrivers of trams etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 305 Exemption for road workers etc. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Exemptionfor oversize vehicles. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .308Exemptionfor towtruck drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Exemptionfor postalvehicles .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 310 Exemptionfor garbagetruck drivers etc.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 311 Exemptionfor breakdown vehicles. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .312Traffic control devicesand traffic-relateditems General Diagrams oftraffic control devices,traffic-related itemsand symbols. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 313 Legal effect of traffic controldevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents316 317 318319 320 321322 323 323ADivision 2 324325 326 327328 329 330331 332 333334 335 336Division 3 337338 339 When do trafficcontrol devices comply substantially with this regulation . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Information on or with traffic controldevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limited effectof certain traffic control devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Legal effect of traffic-related itemsmentioned in this regulation . When dotraffic-related items comply substantially with thisregulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of information on or withtraffic control devices and traffic-relateditems .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Reference totraffic control devicesand traffic-relateditems on a road etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Referencesto lightsthat aretraffic signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audible lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Applicationof trafficcontrol devices to lengths of roads andareas Purpose of division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References to traffic controldevices—application to lengths of road and areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .When do traffic control devicesapply toa lengthof roador area—the basic rules. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Length of road to which a traffic sign (except a parking control sign) applies. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. References toa trafficcontrol device applyingto alength of road ........................................ Trafficcontrol devices applyingto amarked lane. . . . . . . . . . . . . Trafficcontrol devices applyingto aslip lane. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Traffic control devicesapplying toan intersection .. .. .. .. .. .. Parking controlsigns applying to a length of road . . . . . . . . . . . .Parking control signsapplying toa lengthof roadin anarea to which another parking control signapplies etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How parkingcontrol signs apply to a length of road. . . . . . . . . . .Traffic control devices applying to an area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How separatedfootpath signs and separated footpath road markings apply. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Application oftraffic control devicesto persons Purpose ofdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . References to traffic controldevices—application to persons . . . When do trafficcontrol devices apply to a person—the basic rules .......................................... 314 317318 319 319 320320322322323323323324324324325325326 326 327328 330331 331 331 Page15
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Contents 340341 342 343344 345 346Part21 347 348 349350 351 352352A 353 353A353B Part 22 354355 356 Schedule 1Schedule 2 Schedule 3Schedule 4 Schedule 5Traffic control devices (except roadmarkings and parking control signs) . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Road markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic signs(except parking control signs) applying to a lengthofroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic signs(except parking control signs) applying to an area . .Traffic control devicesapplying toa driverin amarked lane. .. .Traffic control devices applying to a driverin a slip lane. . . . . . . . Parking controlsigns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . GeneralMeaning of abbreviationsand symbols. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Referencesto adriver doing somethingetc. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. References tocertain kinds of roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Referencesto stoppingor parkingon alength ofroad etc.. .. .. References toleft andright .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .Referencesto stoppingas nearas practicable toa place. .. .. .Giving way to pedestrians crossing a road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Prescribedoffences for ch 5, pt 7 of the Act. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .People with disabilitiessymbols—Act, sch 4, definitionpeople withdisabilities symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . Power-assisted bicycles—Act, sch 4,definition power-assisted bicycle ........................................Repeal and transitionalprovisions Repeal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Continuationof Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 1999,s 266.. .. .. .. .. References toTransport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 1999. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. Abbreviations andsymbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standardor commonlyused traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Otherpermitted traffic signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols and traffic-relateditems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 332 333333 334334 334 335 335335335336336336337338 338339339339340341360384 387Endnotes 12 Indexto endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 404 Key. .. . . . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Page 16
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Contents3 Table of reprints . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 404 4 List oflegislation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 5Listof annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Page17
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 1Introductory [s 1] TransportOperations (Road Use Management—Road Rules) Regulation2009 [as amended by all amendments that commencedon or before 7 April 2014] Part 1 Introductory Division 1General 1Shorttitle This regulation maybe cited asthe Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 or astheQueensland Road Rules. 2 Commencement (1)Thisregulation, other than sections 266 and 267(1), (1AA),(1AB), (1A), (1B) and (1C), commences on 12October 2009. (2) Sections 266 and 267(1), (1AA), (1AB),(1A), (1B) and (1C) commence on 11 March 2010.3 Object Theobject ofthis regulation isto provide roadrules inQueensland thatare substantially uniformwith roadrules elsewhere inAustralia. Current as at 7 April 2014Page19
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 1 Introductory [s 4]Division 2 Some features ofthis regulation 4 Definitions The dictionaryin schedule 5 defines particular words used in thisregulation. 5 Compliance with standards(1) In this regulation, unless otherwisestated— (a) a reference to a standard using thedesignation made up of ‘AS’ and a number is a reference to thestandard as in force from time to time under thatdesignation; and Example —‘AS1754’ is a reference to the standard that is in force underthat designation atthe relevant time,including, forexample, AS1754–1991. (b)areference to a standard using the designation made upof‘AS/NZS’ and a number is a reference to the standardasin force from time to time under that designation.Example —‘AS/NZS 1754’ is a reference to the standardthat is in force under that designation atthe relevant time,including, forexample, AS/NZS1754–1995, AS/NZS1754–2000 orAS/NZS 1754–2004.(2) If this regulation requires a personto fit or use a thing that complies witha standard mentionedin subsection (1),the person complies with the requirementif, when the thing was manufactured, the thing complied withthe standard in force under the designation at thattime. (3) In this section— standardmeans AS or AS/NZS. 6Examples A diagram undera provision is an example for the provision. Page 20Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 2Application of this regulation [s 7–10]7–10 Section numbers not usedNote — This regulationis based on the Australian Road Rules. Some provisionsofthe Australian Road Rules contain provisions that are not relevantto the operation of this regulation. Tomaximise uniformity between this regulation andthe Australian Road Rules, the numbers of some sectionsthat are notrelevant havenot been usedin the numberingof this regulation,unless required for provisions particular to the State.Part2 Application of this regulationDivision 1 Roads androad-related areas 11 Regulation applies to vehicles androad users on roads and road-related areas (1)This regulation appliesto vehicles androad userson roads and road-relatedareas. (2) A referencein this regulation (exceptin this division)to a roadincludes areference toa road-related area, unless otherwiseexpressly stated in this regulation. Examples forsubsection (2) — 1 A reference insection 146 (which deals with driving within a singlemarked lane or line of traffic) to the roadincludes a reference to the road-related area of the road.2 A reference in section 200(1) (whichdeals with certain heavy or long vehicles stopping on roads) to alength of road includes a reference to the road-related area ofthe length of road. 3 A reference in section 31 (which dealswith starting a right turn from a road, except a multi-lane road)to a road does not include a referenceto a road-related area,because ofthe definition insubsection (5) of that section.Current as at 7 April 2014Page21
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 2 Application of thisregulation [s 12] 12Section number not used 13Whatis a road-related area (1)A road-related area is any of thefollowing— (a) an area that divides a road;(b) a footpath or nature strip adjacent toa road; (c) an area that is not a road and that isopen to the public and designated for use by cyclists oranimals; (d) an area that is not a road and that isopen to, or used by, the public for parkingvehicles. (2) However, unless the contrary intentionappears, a reference in this regulation (exceptthis division)to a road-related areaincludes a reference to— (a)anyshoulder of a road; and (b) any other areathat is a footpath or nature strip as defined in thedictionary. (3) In this section— shoulder, ofa road— (a) includes any part of the road that isnot designed to be used by motor vehicles in travelling alongthe road; and (b) includes— (i)fora kerbed road—any part of the kerb; and (ii)fora sealed road—any unsealed part of the road, and any sealedpart of the road outside an edge line on the road;but (c) does not include a bicycle path,footpath or shared path. Page 22 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 2Application of this regulation [s 14]Division 2 Road users andvehicles 14 Road users Aroaduser is a driver, rider, passenger orpedestrian. 15 What is a vehicleA vehicle includes—(a) a motor vehicle, trailer and tram;and (b) a bicycle; and (c)an animal-drawn vehicle,and an animalthat isbeing ridden ordrawing a vehicle; and (d) a combination;and (e) a motorised wheelchair that can travelat over 10km/h (on level ground); butdoes notinclude anotherkind ofwheelchair, atrain, awheeled recreational device,a wheeled toyor a personalmobility device. 16Whois a driver (1)A driver isthe person whois driving avehicle (excepta motorbike, bicycle, animal oranimal-drawn vehicle). (2) However,a driver doesnot include aperson pushinga motorised wheelchair.17 Who is a rider(1) A rideris the personwho is ridinga motorbike, bicycle,animal or animal-drawn vehicle.(2) A riderdoesnot include— (a) a passenger; or (b)aperson walking beside and pushing a bicycle. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 23
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 3 Speed limits [s 18]18 Pedestrian includes personal mobilitydevice user A pedestrian includesa person whois using apersonal mobilitydevice, unlessotherwise expresslystated inthis regulation. Editor’snote — See also the Act, schedule 4,definition pedestrian .19 Reference to driver includes rideretc. Unless otherwiseexpressly statedin this regulation, areference in this regulation (except in thisdivision)— (a) to a driver,includes a reference to a rider; and (b)to driving , includes areference to riding. Part 3 Speedlimits 20 Obeying the speed limitA driver mustnot drive ata speed overthe speed limitapplying to the driver for the length ofroad where the driver is driving. Maximumpenalty—40 penalty units. Note —Seealso the Criminal Code, section 328A (Dangerous operation ofa vehicle) and sections 83 (Careless drivingof motor vehicles) and 84 (Dangerous driving of vehicles (otherthan motor vehicles) etc.) of the Act.21 Speed limit where a speed limit signapplies (1) The speed limit applying to a driverfor a length of road to which a speed limit sign applies isthe number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number onthe sign. Page 24 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 3 Speedlimits [s 22] (2)A speed limitsign ona road appliesto the lengthof road beginningat the signand ending atthe nearest ofthe following— (a)aspeed limit sign on the road with a different number onthesign; (b) an end speed limit sign or speedderestriction sign on the road; (c)ifthe road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the endofthe road. Examples —Speedlimit sign (Standard sign) Other signs Speed limit sign(Variable illuminated message sign) End speed limitsign Speed derestriction sign 22Speedlimit in a speed limited area (1)Thespeed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in aspeed limitedarea isthe number ofkilometres perhour indicated by thenumber on the area speed limit sign on a road Current as at 7April 2014 Page 25
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 3 Speed limits [s 23]intothe area, unless another speed limit applies to the driverforthe length of road under another section of this part.Example of another speed limit—Although an area speed limit sign on a roadinto a speed limited area may indicate a speed limit of 60km/h,a particular length of road in the area may have aschool zone sign indicating a 40km/h speed limit forthatlength of road. (2) A speed limitedarea is the network of roads in an areawith— (a) an areaspeed limitsign oneach roadinto thearea, indicating thesame number; and (b) an end area speed limit sign on eachroad out of the area. (3) In thissection— road ,in subsection (2)(a)and (b), doesnot include aroad-related area. Examples— Area speed limit signEndarea speed limit sign 23 Speed limit in aschool zone (1) The speed limit applying to a driverfor any length of road in a school zone isthe number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number onthe school zone sign on a road, or the road, intothezone. (2) A schoolzone is— Page 26 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 3 Speedlimits [s 24] (a)if there isa school zonesign andan end schoolzone sign, or a speedlimit sign with a different number on the sign, on aroad—that length of road; or (b)ifthere is a school zone sign on a road that ends in adeadend and there is no sign mentioned in paragraph (a),on the lengthof road beginningat the signand ending at the dead end—that length ofroad. Examples —School zone sign End school zonesign 24 Speed limit in a shared zone(1) The speed limit applying to a driverfor any length of road in a shared zone isthe number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number onthe shared zone sign on a road, or the road, intothezone. (2) A sharedzone is— (a) ifthere isa shared zonesign andan end sharedzone sign on a roadand there is no intersection on the length of road betweenthe signs—that length of road; or (b)ifthere is a shared zone sign on a road that ends in adeadend and there is no intersection on the length ofroad beginningat the signand ending atthe dead end—that lengthof road; or (c) a network of roads in an areawith— (i) a sharedzone signon each roadinto thearea indicating thesame number; and Current as at 7 April 2014Page27
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 3 Speed limits [s 24A](ii) anend shared zonesign oneachroad out of thearea; or (d)aroad related area that is between a shared zone signthatrelates to the area and an end shared zone sign thatrelates to the area. (3)Insubsection (2)(c)(i) and (ii)— roaddoesnot include a road-related area. Examples— Shared zone sign End shared zonesign 24A Speed limit for certainvehicles (1) This section applies to a driverdespite a higher speed limit that wouldotherwise apply to the driver under this part. (2)Thespeed limit applying to the following drivers for a lengthofroad where the driver is driving is— (a)for a driverdriving atractor towinga sugar canetrailer—50km/h; (b)fora driver driving an oversize vehicle that is required totravel with a pilot or escortvehicle—80km/h; (c) for a driver driving a roadtrain—90km/h; (d) for a driver driving a bus with a GVMover 5t, or another vehicle with a GVM over 12t—100km/h.(3) In this section— sugar canetrailer means a trailer— Page 28Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 25] (a)withan ATM within the meaning of the Standards and SafetyRegulation of not more than 20t; and (b)designed for carrying sugar cane.tractor doesnot include amotor vehiclebuilt totow a semitrailer. 25Speedlimit elsewhere (1) If a speed limit sign does not applyto a length of road and the length of roadis not in a speed limited area, school zone or shared zone, thespeed limit applying to a driver for the length of road is thedefault speed limit. (2) Thedefault speed limit applying to adriver for a length of road is— (a)fora road in a built-up area—50km/h; or (b)fora road that is not in a built-up area—100km/h. Part 4Making turns Division 1Leftturns 26 Application of division toroundabouts, road-related areas and adjacent land(1) This division does not apply to adriver entering or leaving a roundabout. (2)Thisdivision applies to a driver turning left from a road into aroad-related area or adjacent land, or froma road-related area into a road, as if the driver were turningleft at an intersection. (3) In thissection— road does not includea road-related area. Current as at 7 April 2014Page29
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 27]27 Starting a left turn from a road(except a multi-lane road) (1) A driver turningleft at an intersection from a road (except a multi-lane road)must approachand enter theintersection from as near aspracticable to the far left side of the road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (1A) Subsection (1)also appliesto a riderof a bicyclewho approaches and enters an intersectionfrom a bicycle storage area. (1B)Despite subsection (1), if there is space ina bicycle storage area for 2 riders of bicycles to be next toeach other, the rider on the right may approach and enterthe intersection as near as practicable tothe right side of the other rider, but only if thatother riderapproaches andenters theintersection inaccordance with this section.(2) In this section— roaddoesnot include a road-related area. Example— Starting a left turn from a road(except a multi-lane road) Page 30 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 28] 28Starting a left turn from a multi-laneroad (1) A driver turning left at anintersection from a multi-lane road must approachand enter the intersection from within the left laneunless— (a) the driver is required or permitted toapproach and enter the intersection from within another markedlane under section 88(1), 92 or 159; or(b) the driver is turning, at B lights ora white traffic arrow, in accordance with part 17, division2; or (c) subsection (1A) or (2) applies to thedriver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example for subsection (1)(a)— Starting a left turn on a multi-laneroad with traffic lane arrows as required or permitted undersection 92 (1A) A driver turningleft at an intersection from a multi-lane road that has a sliplane must approach and enter the intersection— (a)fromwithin the slip lane; or (b) if there is anobstruction that prevents the driver from enteringthe intersection fromwithin theslip lane—from withinthe left lane. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page31
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 28](2) A drivermay approach andenter theintersection fromthe marked lane next to the left lane aswell as, or instead of, the left laneif— (a) the driver’s vehicle, together withany load or projection, is 7.5m long, or longer; and(b) the vehicledisplays ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign; and (c)anypart of the vehicle is within 50m of the nearest pointofthe intersection; and (d) it is notpracticable for the driver to turn left from withintheleft lane; and (e) the driver can safely occupy the nextmarked lane and can safely turn left at the intersection byoccupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.Example —Longvehicle turning left from the left lane and next marked lane(2A) Ifthere isa bicycle storagearea beforean intersection thatextends across 1 or more marked lanes of amulti-lane road, a rider ofa bicycle turningleft mustapproach andenter theintersection from within the part of thebicycle storage area that is directly in front of the leftmarked lane or of a bicycle lane that is onthe left side of the road. Page 32 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 29] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) In thissection— left lane means—(a) the marked lane nearest to the farleft side of the road; or (b) if there is anobstruction (for example, a parked car or roadworks) inthat markedlane—the markedlane nearest to thatmarked lane that is not obstructed. markedlane , for a driver, does not include a specialpurpose lane in which the driver is not permitted todrive. Examples of do not overtake turning vehiclesigns — 29 Making a leftturn as indicated by a turn line (1)If adriver is turning left at an intersection and there is aturn line indicating how the turn is required tobe made, the driver must make the turn as indicated by the turnline unless— (a) the driveris turning, atB lights ortraffic arrows,in accordance with part 17, division 2;or (b) subsection (2) applies to thedriver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page33
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 29]Example— Making a leftturn as indicated by a turn line (2)A driver mayturn leftat an intersection otherthan asindicated by a turn line if—(a) the driver’s vehicle, together withany load or projection, is 7.5m long, or longer; and(b) the vehicledisplays ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign; and (c)itis not practicable for the driver to turn left as indicatedbythe turn line; and (d) the driver can safely turn left otherthan as indicated by the turn line. Examples of donot overtake turning vehicle signs— Page 34Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 30] Division 2Right turns 30Application of division to certain rightturns (1) This division does not applyto— (a) a driver turning right at anintersection where there is a hook turn onlysign; or (b) the rider of a bicycle making a hookturn under division 3; or (c)adriver making a U-turn; or (d) a driverentering or leaving a roundabout. (2)Thisdivision applies to a driver turning right from a road intoa road-related areaor adjacent land,or from aroad-related areainto aroad, asif the driverwere turningright atan intersection. (3)Inthis section— road does not includea road-related area. 31 Starting a right turn from a road(except a multi-lane road) (1) A driver turningright at an intersection from a road (except a multi-lane road)must approach and enter the intersection in accordance withthis section. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the road has a dividing line ormedian strip, the driver must approach andenter the intersection from the left of, parallelto,and as near as practicable to, the dividing line or medianstrip. (3)Ifthe road does not have a dividing line or median strip andis not a one-way road, the driver must approachand enter the intersection fromthe left of,parallel to,and as nearas practicable to, the centre of theroad. Current as at 7 April 2014Page35
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 31](4) If the road is a one-way road, thedriver must approach and enter theintersection fromas near aspracticable tothe far right side ofthe road. (4A) Subsections (2),(3) and (4) also apply to a rider of a bicycle whoapproaches andenters anintersection froma bicycle storagearea. (4B) Despitesubsections (2),(3) and (4),if there isspace ina bicycle storage area for 2 riders ofbicycles to be next to each other,the rider onthe left mayapproach andenter theintersection as near as practicable to theleft side of the other rider, butonly ifthat otherrider approaches andenters theintersection in accordance with thissection. (5) In this section— roaddoesnot include a road-related area. Examples— Example 1 Startinga right turnfrom aroad with a dividingline Example 2 Starting a rightturn from a one-way road Page 36Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 32] 32Starting a right turn from a multi-laneroad (1) A driver turning right at anintersection from a multi-lane road must approachand enter the intersection from within the rightlaneunless— (a) the driver is required or permitted toapproach and enter the intersection fromwithin anothermarked lanein accordance with section 89(1), 92 or159; or (b) the driver is turning, at B lights ora white traffic arrow, in accordance with part 17, division2; or (c) subsection (2) applies to thedriver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example for subsection (1)(a)—Starting a right turn on a multi-lane roadwith traffic lane arrows as required or permitted undersection 92 (2) A drivermay approach andenter theintersection fromthe marked lane next to the right lane aswell as, or instead of, the right laneif— (a) the driver’s vehicle, together withany load or projection, is 7.5m long, or longer; and(b) the vehicledisplays ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign; and Current as at 7April 2014 Page 37
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 32](c) any part of the vehicle is within 50mof the nearest point of the intersection; and(d) it isnot practicable forthe driver toturn rightfrom within the rightlane; and (e) the driver can safely occupy the nextmarked lane and can safely turn right at the intersection byoccupying the next marked lane, or both lanes.(2A) Ifthere isa bicycle storagearea beforean intersection thatextends across 1 or more marked lanes of amulti-lane road, a rider of a bicycle turning right (but notmaking a hook turn) must approach and enter the intersectionfrom within the part of the bicycle storage area that isdirectly in front of the right marked lane orof a bicycle lane that is on the right side of theroad. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) In thissection— marked lane , for a driver,does not include a special purpose lane in whichthe driver is not permitted to drive. rightlane means— (a)themarked lane nearest to the dividing line or medianstrip on the road; or (b)ifthere is an obstruction (for example, a parked car orroadworks) inthat markedlane—the markedlane nearest to thatmarked lane that is not obstructed. Examples of donot overtake turning vehicle signs —Page38 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 33] 33Making a right turn (1)Adriver turning right at an intersection must make the turnin accordance with this section unless—(a) the driveris turning, atB lights ortraffic arrows,in accordance with part 17, division 2;or (b) subsection (4) applies to thedriver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If there is a turn line indicating howthe turn is required to be made, the driver must make the turn asindicated by the turn line. (3)Ifthere is no turn line indicating how the turn is required tobe made, the driver must make the turn so thedriver— (a) passes as near as practicable to theright of the centre of the intersection; and(b) turns into the left of the centre ofthe road the driver is entering, unless the driver isentering a one-way road. Examples —Making a right turn as indicated byturnlines Current as at 7 April 2014Making a right turn from a roadwithno turn lines indicating how to make the turn(diagram shows the location of the centre of theintersection) Page39
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 34](4) A driver may turn right other than asindicated by a turn line if— (a)thedriver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,is7.5m long, or longer; and (b) thevehicle displaysa do notovertake turningvehicle sign; and(c) it isnot practicable forthe driver toturn rightas indicated by the turn line; and(d) the drivercan safely makethe turn otherthan asindicated by the turn line.Examples of do not overtake turning vehiclesigns — Division 3 Hook turns atintersections 34 Making a hook turn at a hook turn onlysign (1) A driver turning right at anintersection with traffic lights and a hook turn onlysign must turn right by making a hook turn in accordance withthis section. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) To make a hook turn,the driver must take, in sequence, each of the followingsteps— 1 Approach andenter theintersection fromas near aspracticable to the far left side of the roadthat the driver is leaving. Page 40Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 34] 2Moveforward— (a) keeping as near as practicable to thefar left side of the intersection; and (b)keeping clear of any marked footcrossing; until the driver is as near as practicableto the far side of the road that the driver is entering.3 Remain atthe position reachedunder step2 until thetraffic lightson the roadthat thedriver isentering change togreen. 4 Turn right into the road that thedriver is entering. (3) In this section— roaddoesnot include a road-related area. Examples— Hook turn only signCurrent as at 7 April 2014Making a hook turn at a hook turnonlysign Page 41
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 35]35 Optional hook turn by a bicyclerider (1) The rider of a bicycle turning rightat an intersection, without a hook turn onlysign or a no hook turn by bicycles sign, may turn right atthe intersection by making— (a)aright turn under division 2; or (b)ahook turn under this section. (2)The rider mustmake ahook turnunder thissection inaccordance with subsection (3).Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) To make a hook turnunder this section, the rider must take,in sequence, each of the followingsteps— 1 Approach andenter theintersection fromas near aspracticable to the far left side of the roadthat the rider is leaving. 2Moveforward— (a) keeping as near as practicable to thefar left side of the intersection; and (b)keeping clear of any marked foot crossing;and (c) keeping clear, as far as practicable,of any driver turning left from the left of theintersection; until the rider is as near as practicable tothe far side of the road that the rider is entering.3 If there are traffic lights at theintersection, remain at the position reachedunder step 2 until the traffic lights on the road thatthe rider is entering change to green. 4Ifthere are no traffic lights at the intersection, remain atthe position reachedunder step2 until therider hasgiven way to approaching drivers on the roadthat the rider is leaving. 5Turnright into the road that the rider is entering. (4)Tomake a hook turn under thissection at an intersection that hasa bicycle hookturn storagearea onthe left sideof the Page 42Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 35] intersection asthe rider approaches the intersection, the ridermusttake the following initial 2 steps instead of the initial 2steps listed in subsection (3)—1 Approach the intersection from the farleft side of the road therider isleaving andenter theintersection bymoving into the bicycle hook turn storagearea, keeping clear of any marked foot crossing.2 Move forward in the bicycle hook turnstorage area until the rider is as near as practicable to thefar side of the road that the rider is entering.Example 1— Bicycle ridermaking a hook turn at an intersection without traffic lights wherethere is a bicycle hook turn storage areaCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page43
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 36]Example 2— Bicycle ridermaking a hook turn at an intersection without traffic lights(5) In this section— bicycle hookturn storage area — (a) meansan area betweenan intersection anda marked foot crossing,or if there is no marked foot crossing, a stop line,before the intersection that has painted on it 1ormore bicycle symbols and 1 or more right traffic lanearrows; and (b)includes anyline thatdelineates theright sideof the area, and anyline that delineates the left side of the area thatis not alsoa stop lineor part ofa marked footcrossing and excludes any bicycle storagearea. 36 Bicycle rider making a hook turncontrary to no hook turn by bicycles sign Therider ofa bicycle mustnot make ahook turnat an intersectionthat has a no hook turn by bicycles sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 44 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 37] Example—Nohook turn by bicycles sign Division 4 U-turns37 Beginning a U-turn A driver mustnot begin a U-turn unless— (a) the driver has aclear view of any approaching traffic; and(b) the drivercan safely makethe U-turn withoutunreasonably obstructing the free movementof traffic. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.38 Giving way when making a U-turnAdriver making a U-turn must give way to all vehicles andpedestrians. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 39 Making a U-turncontrary to a no U-turn sign (1)Adriver must not make a U-turn at a break in a dividing stripon a roadif there isa no U-turnsign atthe break inthe dividing strip. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver mustnot make a U-turn on a length of road to which a no U-turn signapplies. Current as at 7 April 2014Page45
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Making turns [s 40]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) A noU-turn signon a road(except ano U-turn signat an intersection orat a breakin a dividingstrip) appliesto the length of roadbeginning at the sign and ending at the nearer of thefollowing— (a) the next intersection on theroad; (b) if the road ends at a T-intersectionor dead end—the end of the road. Example of noU-turn signs— No U-turn sign (Standard sign)NoU-turn sign (Variable illuminated message sign)40 Making a U-turn at an intersectionwith traffic lights A driver must not make a U-turn at anintersection with traffic lights unlessthere isa U-turn permittedsign atthe intersection. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example of U-turn permittedsign— Page 46 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 4 Makingturns [s 41] 41Making a U-turn at an intersection withouttraffic lights A driver must not make a U-turn at anintersection without traffic lights if there is a no U-turnsign at the intersection. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. 42 Starting a U-turn at anintersection A driver makinga U-turn atan intersection muststart theU-turn— (a)ifthe road where the driver is turning has a dividing lineor median strip—from themarked lanenearest, oras near as practicable, to the dividingline or median strip; or (b)in any othercase—from theleft ofthe centre ofthe road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example— Starting aU-turn on a road with a median strip Current as at 7April 2014 Page 47
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change of direction and stopsignals [s 43] 43Section number not used Part 5Change of direction and stopsignals Division 1Change of direction signals44 Division does not apply to entering orleaving a roundabout This divisiondoes not apply to a driver entering, in or leavingaroundabout. 45 What is changingdirection (1) A driver changesdirection if— (a) the driverchanges direction to the left; or (b)thedriver changes direction to the right. (2)A driver changesdirection tothe left bydoing anyof the following— (a)turning left; (b)changing marked lanes to the left;(c) diverging to the left;(d) entering a marked lane, or a line oftraffic, to the left; (e) moving to theleft from a stationary position; (f)turning left into a marked lane, or a lineof traffic, from a median strip parking area;(g) at a T-intersection where thecontinuing road curves to the right—leaving thecontinuing roadto proceed straight aheadonto the terminating road. Page 48 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change ofdirection and stop signals [s 45] (3)Adriver changes direction to the rightbydoing any of the following— (a)turning right; (b)changing marked lanes to the right;(c) diverging to the right;(d) entering a marked lane, or a line oftraffic, to the right; (e) moving to theright from a stationary position; (f)turning right into a marked lane, or a lineof traffic, from a median strip parking area;(g) making a U-turn; (h)at aT-intersection where the continuing road curves totheleft—leaving the continuing road to proceed straightahead onto the terminating road.Examples for subsections (2)(g) and(3)(h)— Example 1 Example 2Driver indicating change of direction ata Driver indicating change of direction ata T-intersection where the continuingroad T-intersection where the continuingroad curves to the right and the driver iscurves to the left and the driver isproceeding straight ahead onto theproceeding straight ahead onto theterminating road terminatingroad Current as at 7 April 2014Page49
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change of direction and stopsignals [s 46] 46Giving a left change of directionsignal (1) Before a driver changes direction tothe left, the driver must give aleft changeof direction signalin accordance withsection 47 for long enough to complywith— (a) subsection (2); and(b) if subsection (3) applies to thedriver—subsection (3). Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) The driver must give the change ofdirection signal for long enough togive sufficient warningto other driversand pedestrians. (3)Ifthe driver is about to change direction by moving from astationary position at the side of the roador in a median strip parking area,the driver mustgive thechange ofdirection signalfor at least5 seconds beforethe driver changesdirection. (4)Thedriver must stop giving the change of direction signal assoonas the driver completes the change of direction.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5) This section does not apply to adriver if the driver’s vehicle is not fitted withdirection indicator lights. 47 How to give aleft change of direction signal The driver of avehicle must give a left change of direction signal byoperating the vehicle’s left direction indicator lights.48 Giving a right change of directionsignal (1) Before a driver changes direction tothe right, the driver must give aright changeof direction signalin accordance withsection 49 for long enough to complywith— (a) subsection (2); and(b) if subsection (3) applies to thedriver—subsection (3). Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. Page 50 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change ofdirection and stop signals [s 49] (2)Thedriver must give the change of direction signal for longenough togive sufficient warningto other driversand pedestrians. (3)Ifthe driver is about to change direction by moving from astationary position at the side of the roador in a median strip parking area,the driver mustgive thechange ofdirection signalfor at least5 seconds beforethe driver changesdirection. (3A)Subsection (3) does not apply to the riderof a bicycle that is stopped in traffic but notparked. (4) The driver must stop giving the changeof direction signal as soon as the driver completes thechange of direction. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (5) This section does not apply to—(a) the driverof a tramthat isnot fitted withdirection indicatorlights; or (b) the rider of a bicycle making a hookturn. 49 How to give a right change ofdirection signal (1) The driver of a vehicle must give aright change of direction signal byoperating thevehicle’s rightdirection indicatorlights. (2)However, if the vehicle’s directionindicator lights are not in working order orare not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted withdirection indicator lights, the driver must give thechange of direction signal by—(a) giving a hand signal in accordancewith section 50; or (b) using amechanical signalling devicefitted tothe vehicle. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 51
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change of direction and stopsignals [s 50] 50Howto give a right change of direction signal by giving ahandsignal To give a hand signal for changing directionto the right, the driver must extend the right arm and handhorizontally and at right angles from the right side of thevehicle, with the hand open and the palm facing the directionof travel. Example— Giving a handsignal for changing direction to the right 51Whenuse of direction indicator lights permitted The driver of avehicle must not operate a direction indicator lightexcept— (a) to give a change of direction signalwhen the driver is required to give the signal under thisregulation; or (b) as part of the vehicle’s hazardwarning lights. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page52 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change ofdirection and stop signals [s 52] Division 2Stopsignals 52 Division does not apply to bicycleriders or certain tram drivers This divisiondoes not apply to— (a) the rider of a bicycle; or(b) the driver of a tram that is notfitted with brake lights. 53 Giving a stopsignal (1) A driver must give a stop signal inaccordance with section 54 before stopping or when suddenlyslowing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the driver is stopping, the drivermust give the stop signal for long enough to give sufficientwarning to other road users. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) If the driver isslowing suddenly, the driver must give the stop signal whileslowing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.54 How to give a stop signal(1) The driver of a vehicle must give astop signal by means of the vehicle’s brakelights. (2) However, if the vehicle’s brake lightsare not in working order or are not clearly visible, or thevehicle is not fitted with brake lights, thedriver must give the stop signal by— (a)giving a hand signal in accordance withsection 55; or (b) using amechanical signalling devicefitted tothe vehicle. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 53
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 5 Change of direction and stopsignals [s 55] 55Howto give a stop signal by giving a hand signal (1)Togive a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing, thedriver must extend the right arm and hand atright angles from the right side of the vehicle with—(a) the upperarm horizontal andthe forearm andhand pointingupwards; and (b) the handopen andthe palm facingthe direction oftravel. (2)However, the rider of a motorbike may givethe hand signal by extending the left arm and hand at rightangles from the left side of the motorbike with—(a) the upperarm horizontal andthe forearm andhand pointingupwards; and (b) the handopen andthe palm facingthe direction oftravel. Example—Giving a hand signal for stopping orsuddenly slowing Page 54 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Trafficlights, traffic arrows and twin red lights [s 56]Part6 Traffic lights, traffic arrows andtwinred lights Division 1 Obeying trafficlights and traffic arrows 56Stopping on a red traffic light orarrow (1) A driver approaching or at trafficlights showing a red traffic light—(a) must stop— (i)ifthere is a stop line at or near the traffic lights—asnearas practicable to, but before reaching, the stopline; or (ii)ifthere is a stop here on red signal sign at or nearthe traffic lights,but no stopline—as nearas practicable to, but before reaching,the sign; or (iii) if there is nostop line or stop here on red signal signat or nearthe traffic lights—asnear aspracticable to, but before reaching, thenearest or only traffic lights; and (b)mustnot proceed until— (i) the traffic lights change to green orflashing yellow or show no traffic light; or(ii) a green orflashing yellow traffic arrow is showing, if the driver isturning in the direction indicated by thearrow. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page55
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights [s 56] Example forsubsection (1)(a)(ii)— Stopping at a stop here on red signalsign on a road the driver is entering (1A)However, if the traffic lights are at anintersection with a left turn on red after stopping sign andthe driver is turning left at theintersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.(2) A driver approaching or at trafficarrows showing a red traffic arrow who isturning in the direction indicated by the arrow—(a) must stop— (i)if there isa stop lineat or nearthe traffic arrows—asnear aspracticable to,but before reaching, thestop line; or (ii) if there is astop here on red arrow sign at or near thetraffic arrows,but no stopline—as nearas practicable to, but before reaching,the sign; or (iii) if there is nostop line or stop here on red arrow signat or nearthe traffic arrows—asnear aspracticable to, but before reaching, thenearest or only traffic arrows; and (b)mustnot proceed until— Page 56 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Trafficlights, traffic arrows and twin red lights [s 57](i) the trafficarrows changeto green orflashing yellow;or (ii) the trafficlights show a green or flashing yellow trafficlight andthere isno red oryellow trafficarrow showing. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Examples— Stop here on redsignal sign Stop here on red arrow sign(3) If thereis a bicyclestorage areabefore anytraffic lightsreferred to in subsection (1) or (2), areference to the stop line in subsection (1)(a) or (2)(a)—(a) in the case of a driver of a motorvehicle, is a reference to the first stop line that the drivercomes, or came, to in approaching the lights; or(b) in the case of a rider of a bicycle,is a reference to the stop line that is nearest to theintersection. 57 Stopping for a yellow traffic light orarrow (1) A driverwho is approaching, orat, traffic lightsshowing ayellow traffic light— (a)muststop— (i) if there is a stop line at or near thetraffic lights and the driver can stop safely before reachingthe stop line—as nearas practicable to,and before reaching, thestop line; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page57
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights [s 57] (ii)ifthere is no stop line at or near the traffic lightsandthe driver can stop safely before reaching the trafficlights—as near as practicable to, and before reaching, thenearest traffic lights; or (iii) ifthe traffic lightsare at anintersection andthe driver can not stop safely undersubparagraph (i) or (ii), butcan stop safelybefore enteringthe intersection—before entering theintersection; and (b) must not proceed until the trafficlights— (i) change to green or flashing yellow;or (ii) show no trafficlight. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver who is approaching, or at,traffic arrows showing a yellow traffic arrow, and turning inthe direction indicated by the arrow— (a)muststop— (i) if there is a stop line at or near thetraffic arrows and the driver can stop safely beforereaching the stop line—asnear aspracticable to,and before reaching, thestop line; or (ii) if there is nostop line at or near the traffic arrows and the drivercan stop safely before reaching the trafficarrows—as nearas practicable to,and before reaching, the nearest trafficarrows; or (iii) if the trafficarrows are at an intersection and the driver can notstop safely under subparagraph (i) or (ii),but can stopsafely beforeentering theintersection—before entering theintersection; and (b) must not proceed until the trafficarrows— (i) change to green or flashing yellow;or (ii) show no trafficarrow. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page58 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Trafficlights, traffic arrows and twin red lights [s 58](3) If thetraffic lightsor arrows areat an intersection andthe driver cannot stop safelyunder subsection (1)or (2) andenters the intersection, the driver mustleave the intersection as soon as the driver can do sosafely. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) If thereis a bicyclestorage areabefore anytraffic lightsreferred to in subsection (1) or (2), areference to the stop line in subsection (1)(a) or (2)(a)—(a) in the case of a driver of a motorvehicle, is a reference to the first stop line that the drivercomes, or came, to in approaching the lights; or(b) in the case of a rider of a bicycle,is a reference to the stop line that is nearest to theintersection. 58 Exceptions to stopping for a red oryellow traffic light (1) Adriver approaching orat traffic lightsshowing ared or yellowtraffic lightdoes nothave tostop ifa green trafficarrow is also showing and the driver isturning in the direction indicated by the arrow.(2) A driverturning atan intersection withtraffic lightswho approaches, oris at, ared traffic lighton the roadthat thedriver is entering does not have to stop forthe red traffic light if there is no stop line or stop hereon red signal sign at or near the trafficlight. 59 Proceeding through a red trafficlight (1) If traffic lights at an intersection,bicycle crossing or marked foot crossing are showing a redtraffic light, a driver facing the redtraffic lightmust notenter theintersection, bicyclecrossing or marked foot crossing.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) However, if the traffic lights are atan intersection with a left turn on redafter stopping sign and the driver is turning left atCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page59
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights [s 60] theintersection, thedriver mayturn leftbefore thetraffic lights change togreen or flashing yellow. Example— Left turn on redafter stopping sign (3) Subsection (1)does notapply toa driver ifsection 58(1)applies to the driver. 60Proceeding through a red trafficarrow If traffic arrows at an intersection ormarked foot crossing are showing ared traffic arrow,and a driveris turning inthe direction indicated by the arrow, thedriver must not enter the intersection or marked footcrossing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.60A Proceeding through a bicycle storagearea before a red traffic light or arrow (1)Ifthere is a bicycle storage area before traffic lights thatare showing a red traffic light, a driver of amotor vehicle must not allow any part of the vehicle to enterthe bicycle storage area. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) If there is abicycle storage area before traffic arrows that areshowing a red traffic arrow, and a driver ofa motor vehicle is turning in the direction indicated by thearrow, the driver must not allow any part of the vehicle toenter the bicycle storage area. Page 60Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Trafficlights, traffic arrows and twin red lights [s 61]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.61 Proceeding when traffic lights orarrows at an intersection change to red or yellow(1) This section applies to adriver— (a) at anintersection withtraffic lightsshowing agreen traffic lightwho has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red signalsign, or nearest or only traffic lights, at the intersection andis not makinga hook turnat the intersection;or (b) at anintersection withtraffic arrowsshowing agreen traffic arrowwho is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow andhas stopped after the stop line, stop here on red arrowsign, or nearest or only traffic arrows, at theintersection. Example —Adriver may stop after the stop line at an intersection with trafficlights showing a green traffic light, and notproceed through the intersection, because trafficis congested. (2) If the traffic lights or arrows changeto red or yellow while the driver isstopped andthe driver hasnot entered theintersection, the driver must not enter theintersection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) However, if the traffic lights are atan intersection with a left turn on redafter stopping sign and the driver is turning left attheintersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.(4) Also, subsection (2) does not apply toa driver if section 58(1) applies to the driver.(5) If the traffic lights or arrows changeto red or yellow while the driver is stopped and the driver hasentered the intersection, the driver must leave the intersectionas soon as the driver can do so safely. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page61
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights [s 62] Division 2Giving way at traffic lights andtraffic arrows 62Giving way when turning at intersection withtraffic lights (1) A driver turning at an intersectionwith traffic lights must give way to—(a) any pedestrian at or near theintersection who is crossing the road thedriver is entering; and (aa) any rider of abicycle at or near the intersection who is crossing theroad the driver is entering on a marked foot crossing;and (b) if thedriver isturning leftat a leftturn onred after stopping sign atthe intersection— (i) any vehicleapproaching fromthe right, turningright at the intersection into the road thedriver is entering, ormaking aU-turn atthe intersection; and(ii) any pedestrianor rider of a bicycle at or near the intersection whois on theroad thedriver isleaving; and (c)ifthe driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle thatisgoing straight ahead or turning left at the intersection(except a vehicle turning left using a sliplane). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) However, a driver who is turning at anintersection with traffic arrows showing a green traffic arrowneed not give way to an oncoming vehicleif the driveris turning inthe direction indicated by thegreen traffic arrow. Page 62 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Trafficlights, traffic arrows and twin red lights [s 62]Examples— Example 1Giving way to a pedestrian crossingthe road the driver is enteringExample 2 Driver turningright giving way to an oncoming vehicle going straightahead Example 3 Driver turningright does not have to give way to an oncoming vehicle that isturning left into the road the driver is enteringusing a slip lane In example 1, the vehicle must give way tothe pedestrian. In examples 2 and 3, vehicle B must give wayto vehicle A. Current as at 7 April 2014Page63
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights [s 63] 63Giving way at an intersection with trafficlights not operating or only partly operating(1) This section applies to a driver at anintersection if— (a) traffic lights at the intersection arenot operating; or (b) the trafficlights areshowing onlya flashing yellowtraffic light. (2)Ifthere is a traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, thedriver must comply with section 67 as if the signwere a stop sign at an intersection without trafficlights. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) If thereis no trafficlight-stop signat the intersection, thedriver must give way to vehicles andpedestrians at or near the intersection inaccordance withsection 72or 73 asif the intersection werean intersection withouttraffic lightsor a stop sign, stopline, give way sign or give way line. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example— Trafficlight-stop sign (4) Subsection (3)does notapply ifthe intersection isa roundabout. (5)If the intersection isa roundabout, thedriver mustcomply with section114. Page 64 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Trafficlights, traffic arrows and twin red lights [s 64]64 Giving way at a flashing yellowtraffic arrow at an intersection A driver turningin the direction indicated by a flashing yellow trafficarrow atan intersection withtraffic lightsmust givewayto— (a) any vehicle travelling on the road thedriver is entering; and (b) any pedestrianat or near the intersection who is crossing the road thedriver is entering; and (ba) any rider of abicycle at or near the intersection who is crossing theroad the driver is entering on a marked foot crossing;and (c) if the driver is turning right—anyoncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turningleft at the intersection (except a vehicle turning left using aslip lane). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.65 Giving way at a marked foot crossing(except at an intersection) with a flashing yellow trafficlight (1) This section applies to a driverapproaching or at a marked foot crossing (except at or near anintersection) with a flashing yellow trafficlight at the crossing. (2) The drivermust— (a) give way to any pedestrian or rider ofa bicycle on the crossing; and (b)notobstruct any pedestrian or rider of a bicycle on thecrossing; and (c)not overtake orpass avehicle thatis travelling inthe same directionas the driverand is stopping,or has stopped, to giveway at the crossing. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (3) If there is no pedestrian or rider ofa bicycle on the crossing, and noother vehicletravelling inthe same directionas the Current as at 7April 2014 Page 65
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights [s 66] driverthat isstopping, orhas stopped, togive wayat the crossing, thedriver may proceed through the crossing. Division 3Twinred lights (except at level crossings) 66Stopping for twin red lights (except atlevel crossings) (1) A driver approaching or at twin redlights on a road (except at a levelcrossing) must stop in accordance with subsections (2)and(3). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If there is a stop line at or near thelights and the driver can stop safely before reaching the stopline, the driver must stop as near as practicable to, but beforereaching, the stop line. (3) If there is nostop line at or near the lights and the driver canstopsafely before reaching the lights, the driver must stop asnearas practicable to, but before reaching, the lights.(4) If the driver stops for the lights,the driver must not proceed until the lightsare not showing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page66 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 67] Part 7Giving way Division 1Giving way at a stop sign, stop line,giveway sign or give way line applying to the driver67 Stopping and giving way at a stop signor stop line at an intersection without traffic lights(1) This sectionapplies toa driver atan intersection withouttraffic lights who is facing a stop sign orstop line. (2) The drivermust stopas near aspracticable to,but before reaching—(a) the stop line; or (b)ifthere is no stop line—the intersection. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) Thedriver mustgive wayto a vehiclein, entering orapproaching the intersection except—(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right atthe intersection, if a stopsign, stopline, giveway sign orgive wayline applies to thedriver of the oncoming vehicle; or (b)avehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane;or (c) a vehicle makinga U-turn. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) If the driver is turning left or rightor making a U-turn, the driver mustalso giveway to anypedestrian ator near theintersection crossing the road, or part ofthe road, the driver is entering. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page67
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 67](5) For this section, an oncoming vehicleproceeding through a T-intersection onthe continuing roadis taken notto be turning.Examples— Example 1Stopsign Example 2 Stop lineExample 3 Example 4Stopping and giving way at a stop signto Stopping and giving way at a stop signto vehicles on the left and rightanoncoming vehicle at a stop sign In example 3,vehicle B must stop and give way to each vehicle A.Page68 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 68] Example 5Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to anoncoming vehicle that is not at a stop sign or give waysign In examples 4 and 5, vehicle B must stop andgive way to vehicle A. 68 Stopping andgiving way at a stop sign or stop line at otherplaces (1) This section applies to a driverapproaching or at a place with a stop sign orstop line, unless the place is— (a)anintersection; or (b) a children’s crossing; or(c) an area of a road that is not achildren’s crossing only because it does not have—(i) children crossing flags; or(ii) children’scrossing signs and twin yellow lights; or (d)alevel crossing; or (e) a place with twin red lights.Current as at 7 April 2014Page69
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 68]Examples —• a stop sign at a break in a dividingstrip dividing the part of the road used by the mainbody of moving vehicles from a service road •astop sign on an exit from a carpark where the exit joins theroad (2) The drivermust stopas near aspracticable to,but before reaching—(a) the stop line; or (b)ifthere is no stop line—the stop sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The driver mustgive way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the stopline or stop sign. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Examples— Example 1Stopping and giving way at a stop sign ata break in a dividing strip Example 2Stopping and giving way at a stopsign where a carpark exit joins a roadIneach example, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle A.Page70 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 69] 69Giving way at a give way sign or give wayline at an intersection, other than a roundabout(1) This section applies to a driver at anintersection, other than a roundabout, who is facing a give waysign or give way line. (2) Unless thedriver is turning left using a slip lane, the drivermust giveway to avehicle in,entering orapproaching theintersection except— (a)anoncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection, ifa stop sign,stop line,give waysign orgive wayline applies to thedriver of the oncoming vehicle; or (b)avehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane;or (c) a vehicle makinga U-turn. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2A) If the driver isturning left using a slip lane, the driver must give wayto— (a) a vehicle, other than a vehicle makinga U-turn at the intersection, that is— (i)onthe road that the driver is entering; or (ii)turning right at the intersection into theroad that the driver is entering; and(b) a vehicle or a pedestrian on the sliplane. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) If the driver is turning left or rightor making a U-turn, the driver mustalso giveway to anypedestrian ator near theintersection crossing the road, or part ofthe road, the driver is entering. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5) For thissection, an oncoming vehicle proceeding through aT-intersection onthe continuing roadis taken notto be turning.Current as at 7 April 2014Page71
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 69]Examples— Example 1Giveway sign Example 2 Give wayline Example 3 Giving way at agive way sign to vehicles on the left and rightExample 4 Giving way at agive way sign to an oncoming vehicle at a give way signPage72 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 69A] Example 5Giving wayat a giveway sign toan oncoming vehicle that is not at a stopsign or give way sign Example 6Driver turning right at a give wayline does not have to give way to avehicle turning left using a slip laneInexample 3, vehicle B must give way to each vehicle A.Inexamples 4, 5 and 6, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.69A Two or more drivers facing varioussigns or lines at an intersection If 2 or moredrivers at an intersection are each facing a stopsign, stopline, giveway sign orgive wayline, eachdriver mustgive wayto the otheror others, asrequired underdivision 2, as if none of the drivers werefacing a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give wayline. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.70 Giving way at a give way sign at abridge or length of narrow road A driverapproaching a bridge or length of narrow road with agiveway sign must give way to any oncoming vehicle that isonthe bridge or length of road when the driver reaches thesign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page73
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 71]Examples— Example 1Giving way at a bridge Example 2Giving way at a length of narrow roadIneach example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.71 Giving way at a give way sign or giveway line at other places (1)A driver approaching orat a place(except anintersection, bridge or lengthof narrow road, level crossing, or a place with twin red lights)with a give way sign or give way line must give way inaccordance with this section. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Examples —• a give way sign at a break in adividing strip dividing the part of the road used by themain body of moving vehicles from a service roadPage74 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 72] •agive way sign on a road at a place where a bicycle path meetsthe road (2)Thedriver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at ornearthe give way sign or give way line. Examples—Example 1 Giving way at agive way sign at a break in a dividingstrip Example 2 Giving way at agive way sign where a bicycle path meets a roadInexample 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.Inexample 2, the motor vehicle must give way to the bicycle.Division 2 Giving way at anintersection without traffic lights or a stopsign, stop line, give way sign or give wayline 72 Giving way at anintersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout) (1)A driver atan intersection (excepta T-intersection orroundabout) who is not facing traffic lightsor a stop sign, stop line, giveway sign, orgive wayline, mustgive wayin accordance with this section.Current as at 7 April 2014Page75
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 72]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the driver is going straight ahead,the driver must give way to any vehicle approaching from theright (except a vehicle approaching or at a place with a stopsign, stop line, give way sign, or give way line).Examples— Example 1Driver going straight ahead givingwayto a vehicle on the right that is going straightahead Example 2 Driver goingstraight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the rightthatis turning right In each example, vehicle B must give way tovehicle A. (3) If the driver is turning left (exceptif the driver is using a slip lane), thedriver must give way to— (a) any vehicleapproaching from the right (except a vehicle approaching orat a place with a stop sign, stop line, give way sign, orgive way line); and (b) any pedestrian ator near theintersection crossingthe road the driver is entering.Page76 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 72] Examples—Example 3 Example 4Driver turning left giving way to avehicle Driver turning left giving way to aonthe right that is going straight ahead pedestriancrossing the road the driver is enteringInexample 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.Inexample 4, the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian.(4) If the driver is turning left using aslip lane, the driver must give way to— (a)anyvehicle approaching from the right or turning rightat the intersection intothe road thedriver isentering (except avehicle making a U-turn at the intersection); and(b) any pedestrian on the sliplane. Current as at 7 April 2014Page77
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 72]Example— Example 5Driver turning left using a slip lane givingway to a vehicle that is turning right into the road thedriver is entering In this example, vehicle B must give way tovehicle A. (5) If the driver is turning right, thedriver must give way to— (a) any vehicleapproaching from the right (except a vehicle approaching orat a place with a stop sign, stop line, give way sign, orgive way line); and (b) any oncomingvehicle thatis going straightahead orturning left at the intersection (except avehicle turning left usinga slip laneor a vehicleapproaching orat a place with astop sign, stop line, give way sign, or give way line);and (c) any pedestrian ator near theintersection crossingthe road the driver is entering.Page78 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 72] Examples—Example 6 Driver turningright giving way to a vehicle on the right that is turningright into the road the driver is leavingExample 7 Driver turningright giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is goingstraight ahead on the road the driver isleaving In examples 6 and 7, vehicle B must give wayto vehicle A. Current as at 7 April 2014Page79
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 73]Example 8 Example 9Driver turningright givingway to anDriver turning right giving way to aoncoming vehicle that is turning leftinto pedestrian crossing the road the driveris the road the driver is enteringentering In example 8,vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. In example 9, thevehicle must give way to the pedestrian. 73Giving way at a T-intersection(1) A driver at a T-intersection who isnot facing traffic lights or a stop sign, stopline, give way sign, or give way line, must givewayin accordance with this section. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) If the driver isturning left (except if the driver is using a sliplane) or right from the terminating roadinto the continuing road, the driver must give way to—(a) any vehicle travelling on thecontinuing road except— (i) avehicle approaching orat a placewith astop sign, stop line,give way sign, or give way line; or (ii)avehicle making a U-turn on the continuing road at theT-intersection; and Page 80 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 73] (b)anypedestrian crossing the continuing road at or neartheintersection. Examples— Example 1Driver turning right from theterminating road giving way to a vehicle on thecontinuing road Example 2Driver turning left (except if thedriver is using a slip lane) from theterminating road giving way to a pedestriancrossing the continuing road In example 1,vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. In example 2, thevehicle must give way to the pedestrian. (3)Ifthe driver is turning left from the terminating road intothe continuing road using a slip lane, thedriver must give way to— (a)anyvehicle travelling on the continuing road (except avehicle making a U-turn on the continuingroad at the T-intersection); and (b)anypedestrian on the slip lane. (4)Ifthe driver is turning left (except if the driver is using aslip lane) from the continuing road into theterminating road, the driver mustgive wayto any pedestrian crossingthe terminating road at or near theintersection. Current as at 7 April 2014Page81
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 73]Example— Example 3Driver turning left (except if the driver isusing a slip lane) from the continuing road giving way to apedestrian crossing the terminating road In this example,the vehicle must give way to the pedestrian. (5)If the driveris turning fromthe continuing roadinto theterminating road using a slip lane, thedriver must give way to— (a)anyvehicle approaching from the right (except a vehiclemaking aU-turn fromthe terminating roadat the T-intersection);and (b) any pedestrian on the sliplane. (6) If the driver is turning right fromthe continuing road into the terminatingroad, the driver must give way to— (a)any oncoming vehiclethat istravelling throughthe intersection on the continuing road orturning left at the intersection (except a vehicle approachingor at a place with a stop sign, stop line, give way sign,or give way line); and (b)anypedestrian crossing the terminating road at or neartheintersection. Page 82 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 73] Examples—Example 4 Driver turningright from the continuing road giving way to an oncomingvehicle travelling through the intersection onthe continuing road Example 5Driver leaving the continuing road togostraight ahead on the terminating road giving wayto a vehicle going through the intersection on thecontinuing road Example 5 shows aT-intersection where the continuing road (marked with brokenwhite lines) goesaround acorner. VehicleB is leavingthe continuing roadto enter theterminating road. In examples 4 and 5,vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 83
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 73]Example 6 Example 7Driver turning right from thecontinuing Driver turning right from theroadgiving way to an oncoming vehicle continuing roadgiving way to a turning left from the continuing roadpedestrian crossing the terminatingroad In example 6, vehicle B must give way tovehicle A. In example 7, the vehicle must give way tothe pedestrian. (7) In this section— (a)turning leftfrom thecontinuing roadinto theterminating road, for adriver, includes,where thecontinuing road curves to the right at aT-intersection, leaving thecontinuing roadto proceed straightahead onto theterminating road; and (b) turningright fromthe continuing roadinto theterminating road, for adriver, includes,where thecontinuing roadcurves tothe left ata T-intersection, leavingthe continuing roadto proceed straightahead onto theterminating road. Page 84 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 74] Division 3Entering or leaving road-relatedareas and adjacent land 74Giving way when entering a road from aroad-related area or adjacent land (1)Adriver entering a road from a road-related area, or adjacentland, without traffic lights or a stop sign,stop line, give way sign or give way line must give way to allof the following— (a) a vehicle travelling on the road orturning into the road, except avehicle turningright intothe road froma road-related area or adjacentland; (b) a pedestrian on the road;(c) a vehicle or a pedestrian on aroad-related area that the driver crosses to enter theroad; (d) for a driver entering the road from aroad-related area— (i) a pedestrian on the road-related area;and (ii) anothervehicle aheadof the driver’svehicle orapproaching from the left or right.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— roaddoesnot include a road-related area. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 85
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 75]Example— Driver entering aroad from a road-related area giving way to a pedestrian onthe footpath and a vehicle on the roadInthis example, vehicle B must give way to the pedestrian on thefootpath and to vehicle A. 75Giving way when entering a road-related areaor adjacent land from a road (1)Adriver entering a road-related area or adjacent land from aplace on a road without traffic lights or astop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line mustgive way to— (a) any pedestrian on the road; and(b) any vehicle or pedestrian on anyroad-related area that the driver crosses or enters;and (c) if thedriver isturning rightfrom theroad—any oncomingvehicle onthe road thatis going straightahead or turning left; and(d) if the road the driver is leaving endsat a T-intersection opposite the road-related area or adjacentland and the driver is crossing the continuing road—anyvehicle on the continuing road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 86 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 76] (2)Inthis section— road does not includea road-related area. Examples— Example 1Driver turning right from a road intoaroad-related area giving way to an oncoming vehiclethat is going straight ahead and to a pedestrian onthefootpath Example 2 Driver crossinga continuing road at a T-intersection to enter a road-relatedarea giving way to a vehicle on thecontinuing road In each example, vehicle B must giveway to vehicle A. In example 1, vehicle B must alsogiveway to the pedestrian on the footpath. Division 4Keeping clear of and giving way toparticular vehicles 76Keeping clear of trams travelling in tramlanes etc. (1) A driver must not move into the pathof an approaching tram travelling in a tram lane, or on tramtracks marked along the left side of the tracks by a broken orcontinuous yellow line parallel to the tracks.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page87
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 77](2) If a driver is in the path of anapproaching tram travelling in a tram lane, or ontram tracks marked along the left side of the tracks by abroken or continuous yellow line parallel to thetracks, the driver must move out of the pathof the tram as soon as the driver can do so safely.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 77 Giving way to buses(1) A driver driving on a length of roadin a built-up area where the speed limit applying to the driveris not more than 70km/h, in the left lane or left line oftraffic, or in a bicycle lane on the far left side ofthe road, must give way to a bus in front of thedriver if— (a)thebus has stopped, or is moving slowly, at the far leftsideof the road or in a bus-stop bay; and (b)thebus displays a give way to buses sign and the rightdirection indicator lights of the bus areoperating; and (c) the bus is about to enter or proceedin the lane or line of traffic in which the driver isdriving. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— left lane, ofa road, means— (a) the marked lane nearest to the farleft side of the road (the firstlane ) or, if the first lane is a bicycle lane,the marked lane next to the first lane;or (b) if there is an obstruction in thefirst lane (for example, a parked caror roadworks) andthe first laneis not abicycle lane—the marked lane next to thefirst lane. left line of traffic , for a road,means the line of traffic nearest to the far leftside of the road. Page 88 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 78] Example—Giveway to buses sign 78 Keeping clear of police and emergencyvehicles (1) A driver must not move into the pathof an approaching police or emergency vehicle that isdisplaying a flashing blue or red light(whether ornot it isalso displaying otherlights) orsounding an alarm. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Ifa driver isin the pathof an approaching policeor emergency vehiclethat isdisplaying aflashing blueor red light(whether ornot it isalso displaying otherlights) orsounding an alarm, the driver must move outof the path of the vehicle as soon as the driver can do sosafely. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) This section applies to the driverdespite any other section of thisregulation. 79 Giving way to police and emergencyvehicles (1) A driver must give way to a police oremergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or redlight (whether or not it is also displayingother lights) or sounding an alarm. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) This sectionapplies to the driver despite any other section thatwould otherwise require the driver of apolice or emergency vehicle to give way to the driver.Current as at 7 April 2014Page89
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 79A]79A Giving way to escorted vehicles(1) A driver must give way to an oversizevehicle that is being escorted by a pilot or escortvehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) This section applies to the driverdespite any other section that would otherwiserequire the driver of an oversize vehicle to give way to thedriver. Division 5 Crossings andshared zones 80 Stopping at a children’scrossing (1) A driverapproaching achildren’s crossingmust driveat a speed at whichthe driver can, if necessary, stop safely beforethecrossing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver approaching or at achildren’s crossing must stop as near aspracticable to, but before reaching, the stop line at thecrossing if— (a)ahand-held stop sign is displayed at the crossing; or(b) a pedestrian is on or entering thecrossing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) If a driver stops at a children’scrossing for a hand-held stop sign, the drivermust not proceed until there is no pedestrian on or enteringthe crossing and the holder of the sign— (a)nolonger displays the sign towards the driver; or (b)otherwise indicates that the driver mayproceed. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) If a driver stops at a children’scrossing for a pedestrian, the drivermust notproceed untilthere isno pedestrian onor entering the crossing.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page90 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 80] (5)Forthis section, if a children’s crossing extends across a roadwith adividing strip,the part ofthe children’s crossingon each sideof the dividingstrip istaken tobe a separatechildren’s crossing. (6)A children’s crossingisan area of a road— (a) at a place with stop lines marked onthe road, and— (i) children crossing flags; or(ii) children’s crossingsigns andtwin yellowlights; and(b) indicated by— (i)2red and white posts erected on each side of the road; or(ii) 2 parallelcontinuous or broken lines on the road surface from 1side of the road completely or partly across the road;and (c) extending across the road between theposts or lines. Examples— Children crossingflag Current as at 7 April 2014Children’s crossing sign Page91
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 81]Hand-held stop signs Example 1Driver stopped at stop line forpedestrians on a children’s crossingwithchildren crossing flags Example 2 Driver stoppedat stop line for pedestrians on a children’s crossingwith children’s crossing signs and twinyellow lights Ineach of theseexamples, thedriver muststop at thestop line becausethere arepedestrians on the children’scrossing. 81 Giving way at a pedestriancrossing (1) A driverapproaching apedestrian crossingmust driveat a speed at whichthe driver can, if necessary, stop safely beforethecrossing. Page 92 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 81] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Adriver mustgive wayto any pedestrian ona pedestrian crossing.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) A pedestriancrossing is an area of a road— (a)at aplace with white stripes on the road surface that—(i) run lengthwise along the road;and (ii) are ofapproximately the same length; and (iii)areapproximately parallel to each other; and (iv)are in arow that extendscompletely, orpartly, across the road;and (b) with or without either or both of thefollowing— (i) a pedestrian crossing sign;(ii) alternatingflashing twin yellow lights. Examples—Pedestrian crossing sign Current as at 7April 2014 Page 93
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 82]Example 1 Givingway to apedestrian ona pedestrian crossing Example 2Giving way to a pedestrian on apedestrian crossing at a slip laneIneach of these examples, the driver must give way to the pedestrianon the crossing. 82 Overtaking or passing a vehicle at achildren’s crossing or pedestrian crossing Adriver approaching achildren’s crossing,or pedestrian crossing, mustnot overtake or pass a vehicle that is travellingin the samedirection asthe driver andis stopping, orhas stopped, to give way to a pedestrianat the crossing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page94 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 83] Example—Driver not passing a vehicle that hasstopped to give way to a pedestrian at a pedestriancrossing In the example, vehicle A has stopped to giveway to a pedestrian on the crossing. Vehicle B must notovertake or pass vehicle A. 83 Giving way topedestrians in a shared zone Adriver drivingin a sharedzone mustgive wayto any pedestrian inthe zone. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Division 6 Other give wayrules 84 Giving way when driving through abreak in a dividing strip (1)If adriver drives through a break in a dividing strip that hasno stop sign, stop line, give way sign or giveway line, the driver must give way to— (a)anytram on the dividing strip; and Current as at 7April 2014 Page 95
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 84](b) any vehicle travelling on the part ofthe road the driver is entering (except a vehicle to which astop sign, stop line, give way sign, or give way line,applies). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. Examples— Example 1Giving way when driving through abreakin a median strip Example 2 Giving way whendriving through a break in a dividing strip to leave a serviceroad Page 96 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 85] Example 3Giving way when driving through a break in adividing strip to enter a service road In each of theexamples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. 85Giving way on a painted islandAdriver entering a turning lane from a painted island mustgiveway to any vehicle— (a) in the turning lane; or(b) entering the turning lane from themarked lane, or line of traffic, immediately adjacent tothe turning lane. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page97
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Giving way [s 86]Examples— Example 1Driver entering a turning lane from apainted island giving way to a vehicleentering the turning lane from themarked lane immediately to the rightof the turning lane Example 2Driver entering a turning lane from apainted island giving way to avehicle entering the turning lane from themarked lane immediately to the left of theturning lane In the examples, vehicle B must giveway to vehicle A. 86 Giving way in median turningbays (1) A driver entering a median turning baymust give way to any oncoming vehicle already in theturning bay. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— medianturning baymeans amarked lane,or the partof a markedlane— (a) to which a median turning lane signapplies; or (b) where traffic lane arrows applying tothe lane indicate that vehicles travelling in oppositedirections must turn right. Page 98Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 7 Givingway [s 87] Examples—Example 1 Median turninglane sign Example 2 Giving way in amedian turning bay In example 2, vehicle B must give way tovehicle A. 87 Giving way when moving from a side ofa road or a median strip parking area(1) A driver entering a marked lane, or aline of traffic, from the far left or right side of a road mustgive way to any vehicle travelling in the lane or line oftraffic. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) However, the driver of a bus does nothave to give way to a vehicle if— (a)thedriver of the vehicle is required to give way to thebusunder section 77; and (b) it is safe forthe bus to enter the lane or line of traffic in which thevehicle is driving. (3) A driverturning froma median stripparking areainto amarked lane, or a line of traffic, must giveway to any vehicle travelling in the lane or line oftraffic. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page99
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 88] (4)Inthis section— road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Part 8Traffic signs and road markingsDivision 1 Traffic signsand road markings at intersections and other places88 Left turn signs (1)Ifthere is a left turn only sign at an intersection, a drivermust turn left at the intersection.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If there is a left lane must turn leftsign at an intersection, a driver whois in theleft markedlane whenentering theintersection must turn left at theintersection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Examples— Left turn onlysign Page 100 Left lane mustturn left sign Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 89] 89Rightturn signs (1) If there is a right turn onlysign atan intersection, adriver must turn rightat the intersection. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) If there is a right lane must turnright sign at an intersection, a driverwho is inthe right markedlane whenentering theintersection must turn right at theintersection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— turnright does not include make a U-turn.Examples— Right turn onlysign Right lane must turn right sign90 No turns signs If there is a noturns sign at an intersection, a driver must notturnleft or right, or make a U-turn, at the intersection.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page101
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 91] Example—Noturns sign 91 No left turn and no right turnsigns (1) If thereis a noleft turnsign atan intersection, oranother place on a road,a driver must not turn left at the intersection or place.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If there is a no right turn sign at anintersection, or another place on a road, a driver must notturn right or make a U-turn at theintersection or place. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. Examples of no left turn signs—Noleft turn sign (Standard sign) No left turnsign (Variable illuminated message sign) Page 102Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 92] Examples of noright turn signs— No right turn sign (Standard sign)Noright turn sign (Variable illuminated message sign)(3) However, a driver may make a U-turn atthe intersection or place if there is a U-turn permitted sign atthe intersection or place. 92Traffic lane arrows (1)If a driveris driving ina marked laneat an intersection (excepta roundabout) andthere aretraffic lanearrows applying to thelane, the driver must— (a) ifthe arrows indicatea single direction—drive inthat direction;or (b) if the arrows indicate 2 or moredirections—drive in 1 of those directions. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) However, thissection does not apply to a driver if— (a)thearrows indicate a direction to the right (whether ornot they alsoindicate anotherdirection) atan intersection andthe driver ismaking aU-turn atthe intersection; or (b)a traffic signindicates thatthe driver maydrive ina direction differentto that indicatedby the trafficlane arrows;or (c) the driver is driving in the directionindicated by traffic lane arrows that apply to 1 or moremarked lanes and there is an obstruction in each of thoselanes; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page103
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 93] (d)the driver isturning atan intersection inaccordance with section28(2) or 32(2). Examples— Example 1Traffic lane arrows on the surface ofmarked lanes Example 2Traffic lane arrows on a traffic sign(3) The existence of a bicycle storagearea in a marked lane does not alter a driver’s obligation tocomply with this section. Division 2 Traffic signsand road markings generally 93Noovertaking or passing signs (1)Adriver must not— (a) drive pasta no overtaking orpassing signif any oncoming vehicleis on the bridge or length of road to which the signapplies; or (b) overtake a vehicle on a bridge orlength of road to which a no overtaking or passing signapplies. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page104 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 94] (2)A noovertaking or passing sign on a road applies to the lengthofroad (including a length of road on a bridge) beginning atthesign and ending— (a) if information onor with thesign indicatesa distance—at that distance past thesign; or (b) if the sign applies to a bridge—at theend of the bridge; or (c) at an end noovertaking or passing sign on the road. Examples—Noovertaking or passing sign End no overtaking or passingsign 94 No overtaking on bridge signsAdriver on a bridge with a no overtaking on bridge sign mustnotovertake a vehicle between the sign and the far end of thebridge. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page105
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 95] Example—Noovertaking on bridge sign 95 Emergencystopping lane only signs (1) Adriver mustnot drive inan emergency stoppinglane unless—(a) the driver needs to drive in theemergency stopping lane to avoid a collision, to stop in thelane, or because the driver’s vehicle is disabled;or (b) the driveris permitted todrive inthe emergency stopping laneunder another section. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) This section does not apply to therider of a bicycle. (3) In this regulation—emergency stopping lane means a markedlane, or the part of a marked lane, to which an emergencystopping lane only sign applies. Page 106Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 96] Example—Emergency stopping lane only sign96 Keep clear markings(1) A driver must not stop on an area of aroad marked with a keep clear marking. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— keep clearmarking meansthe words ‘keepclear’ markedacross all or part of a road, with orwithout continuous lines marked across all or part of theroad. Examples— Keep clearmarking bounded by line road markingsKeepclear marking with no line road markingsCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page107
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 97] 97Roadaccess signs (1) A driver must not drive on a length ofroad to which a road access sign applies if information onor with the sign indicates that the driver or the driver’svehicle is not permitted beyond the sign.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A roadaccess signon a roadapplies tothe length ofroad beginningat the sign(including anyroad intowhich thelength of road merges) and ending—(a) if the sign is on a freeway—at an endfreeway sign or end road access sign on the road; or(b) if thesign isnot on afreeway—at thenearer ofthe following— (i)if the roadends ata T-intersection ordead end—the end ofthe road; (ii) an end roadaccess sign on the road. Examples —Aroad access sign on an access ramp to a freeway applies to theaccess ramp and the freeway into which the accessramp merges. Road access sign Page 108Endfreeway sign Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 98] End road accesssign 98 One-way signs (1)A driver mustnot drive ona length ofroad towhich aone-way sign applies except in the directionindicated by the arrow on the sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Aone-way signon a roadapplies tothe length ofroad beginningat the signand ending atthe nearer ofthe following— (a)atwo-way sign on the road; (b) a keep left signon the road; (c) another sign or road marking on theroad that indicates that the road is a two-way road;(d) if the road ends at aT-intersection—the end of the road. (3)Thissection does not apply to the rider of a motorbike that is apostal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle orthe rider of an animal if the rider— (a)is riding ona footpath, naturestrip orshared pathadjacent to the length of road; and(b) is permittedto ride onthe footpath, naturestrip orshared path under this regulation.Current as at 7 April 2014Page109
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 99] Examples— One-way sign Two-waysign 99 Keep left and keep right signs(1) A driver driving past a keep left signmust drive to the left of the sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver drivingpast a keep right sign must drive to the right of thesign. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) This section does not apply to therider of a motorbike that is a postal vehicle,the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal iftherider— (a) is riding on a footpath, nature stripor shared path; and (b) is permittedto ride onthe footpath, naturestrip orshared path under this regulation.Page110 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 100] Examples— Keep left sign Keep rightsign 100 No entry signs A driver mustnot drive past a no entry sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Noentry sign 101 Hand-held stop signs(1) A driver approaching a hand-held stopsign must stop before reaching the sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) The driver mustnot proceed until the holder of the sign— (a)nolonger displays the sign towards the driver; or (b)otherwise indicates that the driver mayproceed. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page111
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 101A] (3)This sectiondoes notapply toa driver approaching orat a hand-held stopsign at a children’s crossing. Examples ofhand-held stop signs — 101A Safety ramp andarrester bed signs (1) A driver must not drive on a safetyramp or arrester bed unless it is necessaryfor the driver to do so in the interests of safety.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— arresterbed means anarea towhich anarrester bedsign applies.safety rampmeans anarea towhich asafety rampsign applies.Examples —Arrester bed sign Safety rampsign Page 112 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 102] Division 3Signs for trucks, buses and otherlarge vehicles 102Clearance and low clearance signs(1) A drivermust notdrive pasta clearance sign,or a lowclearance sign,if the driver’svehicle, orany vehicle connected to it,is higher than the height (in metres) indicated by thesign. Maximum penalty—40 penalty units.(2) In this section— vehicleincludes any load carried by thevehicle. Examples —Clearance sign Low clearancesign 103 Load limit signs (1)Adriver must not drive past a bridge load limit (gross mass)signor gross load limit sign if the total of the gross mass (intonnes) of the driver’s vehicle, and anyvehicle connected to it, is more than the gross massindicated by the sign. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) A driver must not drive past a bridgeload limit (mass per axle group) sign if the mass (in tonnes)carried by an axle group of the driver’svehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is morethanthe mass indicated by the sign for the axle group.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page113
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 104] (3)Inthis section— vehicle includes anyload carried by the vehicle. Examples— Bridge load limit (gross mass)sign Gross load limit sign Bridge loadlimit (mass per axle group) sign 104Notrucks signs (1) A driver (except the driver of a bus)must not drive past a no trucks sign that has information on orwith it indicating a mass if the GVM of the driver’s vehicle(or, if the driver is driving a combination, anyvehicle inthe combination) ismore thanthatmass. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver (except the driver of a bus)must not drive past a no trucks signthat hasinformation onor with itindicating alength if the length of the driver’s vehicle(or, if the driver is driving acombination, thelength ofthe combination) islonger than that length. Page 114Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 104] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The driver of atruck must not drive past a no trucks sign that has noinformation on or with it indicating a mass or length.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) It is a defence to a charge undersubsection (1), (2) or (3) for the driver toprove— (a) the destination of the driver’svehicle was on or near the road on which the no trucks sign waslocated; and (b) the driver— (i)could not reach the vehicle’s destination byanother route; or (ii)could reachthe vehicle’s destination byanother route only bydriving past another no trucks sign. (5)Subsections (1) to (3) do not apply to adriver of a motorised caravan on the Brisbane Urban Corridoror on the part of the Ipswich Motorwaybetween GranardRoad andthe Albert Streetpedestrian bridge at Goodna. (6)Inthis section— Brisbane UrbanCorridor meansthe route betweenArcherfield andWishart consisting ofMt Gravatt–Capalaba Road west of theGateway Motorway, Kessels Road, Riawena Road and GranardRoad. motorised caravan means—(a) 1 vehiclewith aGVM over 4.5t,designed mainlyfor people to live in; or(b) a combination of 2 vehicles with a GVMover 4.5t if 1 of the vehicles is designed mainly forpeople to live in and the other has a GVM of less than4.5t. Current as at 7 April 2014Page115
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 105] Example of a notrucks sign — No trucks sign 105Trucks must enter signs If the driver ofa truck drives past a trucks must enter sign, thedriver must enter the area indicated byinformation on or with the sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Trucks must enter sign 106Nobuses signs (1) The driver of a bus must not drivepast a no buses sign that has information on or with itindicating a mass if the GVM of the bus is morethan that mass. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page116 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Trafficsigns and road markings [s 107] (2)Thedriver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign thathasinformation on or with it indicating a length if the bus islonger than that length. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The driver of abus must not drive past a no buses sign that has noinformation on or with it indicating a mass or length.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Nobuses sign 107 Buses must enter signsIfthe driver of a bus drives past a buses must enter sign, thedriver must enter the area indicated byinformation on or with the sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Buses must enter sign Current as at 7April 2014 Page 117
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 8 Traffic signs and roadmarkings [s 108] 108Trucks and buses low gear signs(1) If the driver of a truck or bus isdriving on a length of road to whicha trucks andbuses lowgear signapplies, thedriver must drive thetruck or bus in a gear that is low enough to limit the speedof the truck or bus without the use of a primarybrake. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Subsection (1)does notapply tothe driver ofa bus ifinformation on or with the sign indicatesthat it applies only to trucks. (3)A trucks andbuses lowgear signon a roadapplies tothe length of road beginning at the signand ending— (a) if information onor with thesign indicatesa distance—at that distance on the roadfrom the sign; or (b) in any other case—at an end trucks andbuses low gear sign on the road. (4)Inthis section— primary brake means thefootbrake, or other brake, fitted to a truck or busthat is normally used to slow or stop the vehicle.Examples —Trucks and buses low gear signEndtrucks and buses low gear sign Page 118Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 9Roundabouts [s 109] Part 9Roundabouts 109Whatis a roundabout Aroundabout is anintersection— (a) with either— (i)1 ormore marked lanes, all of which are for the use of vehiclestravelling in the same direction around a centraltraffic island; or (ii) room for 1 ormore lines of traffic travelling in the same directionaround a central traffic island; and (b)withor without a roundabout sign at each entrance. Example— Roundabout sign 110Meaning of halfwayaround a roundabout A driver leavesa roundabout halfway around theroundabout if the driver leaves the roundabout on aroad that is straight ahead, or substantially straightahead, from the road on which the driverenters the roundabout. 111 Entering aroundabout from a multi-lane road or a road with 2 or morelines of traffic travelling in the same direction(1) A driver entering a roundabout from amulti-lane road, or a road withroom for2 or morelines oftraffic, otherthan animals,bicycles, motorbikes ormotorised wheelchairs, Current as at 7April 2014 Page 119
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 9 Roundabouts [s 111]travelling in the same direction as thedriver, must enter the roundabout in accordance with thissection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If thedriver isto leave theroundabout lessthan halfwayaround it, the driver must enter theroundabout— (a) from the left marked lane; or(b) if theroad isnot a multi-lane road—asnear aspracticable to the left side of theroad. Example —Example 1 Leaving aroundabout less than halfway around it (3)If the driveris to leavethe roundabout morethan halfwayaround it, the driver must enter theroundabout from— (a) the right marked lane; or(b) if the road is not a multi-laneroad—the left of, parallel to, andas near aspracticable to,the dividing lineor median strip of the road.Page120 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 9Roundabouts [s 111] Example— Example 2 Leaving aroundabout more than halfway around it (4)Ifthe driver is to leave the roundabout halfway around it, thedriver may enter the roundabout from—(a) any marked lane; or(b) if the road is not a multi-laneroad—any part of the road on which vehicles travelling in thesame direction as the driver may travel. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 121
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 9 Roundabouts [s 111]Example —Example 3 Leaving aroundabout halfway around it (5)Despite subsections (2)to (4), ifthe driver isentering theroundabout froma marked laneand there aretraffic lanearrows applying to the lane, the drivermust— (a) if thearrows indicatea single direction—drive inthat direction afterentering the roundabout; or (b)ifthe arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in 1 ofthose directions after entering theroundabout. Page 122 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 9Roundabouts [s 111] Examples— Example 4 Roundabout with 3entry points Example 5 Roundabout with5 entry points (6) Subsection (3)does notapply tothe rider ofa bicycle oranimal. (7)Subsection (5) does not apply to the riderof a bicycle or an animal ifthe rider isto leave theroundabout morethan halfway aroundit. (8) Despite subsection (2), a driver mayapproach and enter the roundabout from the marked lane nextto the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left laneif— (a) the driver’s vehicle, together withany load or projection, is at least 7.5m long; and(b) the vehicledisplays ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign; and (c)anypart of the vehicle is within 50m of the nearest pointofthe roundabout; and (d) it is not practicable for the driverto leave the roundabout less than halfway around it fromwithin the left lane; and (e) the driver cansafely occupy the next marked lane and cansafely leavethe roundabout lessthan halfwayCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page123
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 9 Roundabouts [s 111]around itby occupying thenext markedlane orboth lanes.(9) Despite subsection (3), a driver mayapproach and enter the roundabout from the marked lane nextto the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right laneif— (a) the driver’s vehicle, together withany load or projection, is at least 7.5m long; and(b) the vehicledisplays ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign; and (c)anypart of the vehicle is within 50m of the nearest pointofthe roundabout; and (d) it is not practicable for the driverto leave the roundabout more than halfway around it fromwithin the right lane; and (e)thedriver can safely occupy the next marked lane andcan safely leavethe roundabout morethan halfwayaround itby occupying thenext markedlane orboth lanes.(10) In thissection— left lane means—(a) the marked lane nearest to the farleft side of the road; or (b) ifthere isan obstruction, including, forexample, aparked caror roadworks inthat markedlane—the markedlane nearestto that markedlane thatis not obstructed. markedlane , for a driver, does not include a specialpurpose lane in which the driver is not permitted todrive. right lane means—(a) the marked lane nearest to thedividing line or median strip of the road; or(b) if thereis an obstruction, including, forexample, aparked caror roadworks inthat markedlane—the Page 124Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 9Roundabouts [s 112] markedlane nearestto that markedlane thatis not obstructed. 112Giving a left change of direction signalwhen entering a roundabout (1)Thissection applies to a driver entering a roundabout if—(a) the driver is to leave the roundaboutat the first exit after entering the roundabout; and(b) the exit is less than halfway aroundthe roundabout. (2) Before enteringthe roundabout, thedriver mustgive aleft change ofdirection signal for long enough to give sufficientwarning to other drivers andpedestrians. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The drivermust continueto give thechange ofdirection signal until thedriver has left the roundabout. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) This sectiondoes not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle isnotfitted with direction indicator lights. 113Giving a right change of direction signalwhen entering a roundabout (1)Thissection applies to a driver entering a roundabout if thedriver is to leave the roundabout more thanhalfway around it. (2) Before entering the roundabout, thedriver must give a right change of direction signal for longenough to give sufficient warning to other drivers andpedestrians. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The drivermust continueto give thechange ofdirection signal while thedriver is driving in the roundabout, unless— (a)thedriver is changing marked lanes, or entering anotherlineof traffic; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page125
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 9 Roundabouts [s 114](b) the driver’s vehicle is not fittedwith direction indicator lights; or (c)thedriver is about to leave the roundabout. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 114 Giving way whenentering or driving in a roundabout (1)Adriver entering a roundabout must give way to— (a)anyvehicle in the roundabout; and (b)atram that is entering or approaching the roundabout.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver driving in a roundabout mustgive way to a tram that is in, entering or approaching theroundabout. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 115 Driving in a roundabout to the left ofthe central traffic island (1)Adriver driving in a roundabout must drive— (a)tothe left of the central traffic island in the roundabout;or (b) if subsection(2) applies to the driver—on the edge of the centraltraffic island, to the left of the centre of theisland; or (c)ifsubsection (3) applies to the driver—over the centraltraffic island, to the left of the centre ofthe island. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) This subsection applies to a driverif— (a) the driver’svehicle istoo large todrive inthe roundabout withoutdriving onthe edge ofthe central traffic island;and Page 126 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 9Roundabouts [s 116] (b)the driver cansafely driveon the edgeof the centraltraffic island. (3)Thissubsection applies to a driver if— (a)the driver’s vehicleis too largeto drive inthe roundabout withoutdriving overthe central trafficisland; and (b)thecentral traffic island is designed to allow a vehicle ofthatkind to be driven over it. 116 Obeying trafficlane arrows when driving in or leaving a roundaboutIf a driveris driving ina marked lanein a roundabout andthere are traffic lane arrows applying tothe lane, the driver must— (a)if the arrowsindicate asingle direction—drive inor leave the roundabout in thatdirection; or (b) if the arrows indicate 2 or moredirections—drive in or leave the roundabout in 1 of thosedirections. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.117 Giving a change of direction signalwhen changing marked lanes or lines of traffic in aroundabout (1) A driver driving in a roundabout mustgive a left change of direction signal before the driverchanges marked lanes to the left, or entersa part of the roundabout where there is room foranother line of traffic to the left, in theroundabout, unless the driver’s vehicle is not fitted withdirection indicator lights. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver drivingin a roundabout must give a right change of direction signalbefore the driver changes marked lanes to the right, or entersa part of the roundabout where there is room for another lineof traffic to the right, in the roundabout. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page127
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 10 Level crossings[s118] 118 Giving a left change of directionsignal when leaving a roundabout (1)Ifpracticable, a driver driving in a roundabout must give aleft change of direction signal when leaving theroundabout. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) The driver must stop giving the changeof direction signal as soon as the driver has left theroundabout. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) This section does not apply to adriver if the driver’s vehicle is not fitted withdirection indicator lights. 119 Giving way by therider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle leaving aroundabout The rider of a bicycle or animal who isriding in the far left marked lane of a roundabout with 2 ormore marked lanes, or the far left line of traffic in aroundabout with room for 2 or more lines oftraffic, other than animals, bicycles, motorbikesor motorised wheelchairs, mustgive wayto any vehicleleaving the roundabout. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Part 10 Levelcrossings 120 What is a levelcrossing (1) A levelcrossing is— (a) an area where aroad and a railway meet at substantially the same level,whether or not there is a level crossing sign on the roadat all or any of the entrances to the area; orPage128 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 10 Levelcrossings [s 121] (b)an area wherea road andtram tracksmeet atsubstantially the same level and that has alevel crossing sign on the road at each entrance to thearea. (2) In this section— roaddoesnot include a road-related area. Examples of levelcrossing signs — 121 Stopping andgiving way at a stop sign at a level crossing A driver at alevel crossing with a stop sign must— (a)stopas near as practicable to, but before reaching, thestopline or, if there is no stop line, as near as practicableto,but before reaching, the stop sign; and (b)give wayto any trainor tram on,approaching orentering the crossing. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Current as at 7 April 2014Stopsign Page 129
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 10 Level crossings[s122] 122 Giving way at a give way sign or giveway line at a level crossing A driver at alevel crossing with a give way sign or give way linemust giveway to anytrain ortram on,approaching orentering the crossing. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Giveway sign 123 Entering a level crossing when a trainor tram is approaching etc. A driver mustnot enter a level crossing if— (a)warning lights (for example, twin red lightsor rotating red lights) are operating or warning bellsare ringing; or (b) a gate,boom orbarrier atthe crossing isclosed oris opening or closing; or(c) a train or tram is on or entering thecrossing; or (d) a trainor tram approaching thecrossing canbe seen from thecrossing, or is sounding a warning, and there would be adanger of a collision with the train or tram if the driverentered the crossing; or (e) the driver cannot drive through the crossing because the crossing, or aroad beyond the crossing, is blocked. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 130 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 124]Example for paragraph (e)— The crossing, or a road beyond thecrossing, may be blocked by congested traffic,a disabled vehicle,a collision betweenvehicles or between a vehicle and apedestrian, or by stock on the road. 124Leaving a level crossing Adriver whoenters alevel crossingmust leavethe level crossing as soonas the driver can do so safely. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Part 11 Keeping left,overtaking and other driving rules Division 1General 125Unreasonably obstructing drivers orpedestrians (1) A driver must not unreasonablyobstruct the path of another driver or apedestrian. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) For this section, a driver does notunreasonably obstruct the path of another driver or a pedestrianonly because— (a) the driver is stopped in traffic;or (b) the driveris driving moreslowly thanother vehicles(unless thedriver isdriving abnormally slowlyin the circumstances). Example of adriver driving abnormally slowly —adriver driving at a speed of 20km/h on a length of road towhicha speed limit of 80km/h applies when there is no reasonforthe driver to drive at that speed on the length of roadCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page131
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 126] 126Keeping a safe distance behindvehicles A driver mustdrive asufficient distancebehind avehicle travelling infront of the driver so the driver can, if necessary,stopsafely to avoid a collision with the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 127 Keeping a minimumdistance between long vehicles (1)Thedriver of a long vehicle must drive at least the requiredminimum distance behind another long vehicletravelling in front of the driver, unless the driveris— (a) driving on— (i)amulti-lane road; or (ii) a length of roadin a built-up area; or (b) overtaking. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— long vehicle means a vehiclethat, together with any load or projection, is7.5m long, or longer. required minimum distancemeans— (a)fora road train—200m; or (b) otherwise—60m. 128Entering blocked intersectionsAdriver must not enter an intersection if the driver can notdrive throughthe intersection becausethe intersection, ora road beyond the intersection, isblocked. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Theintersection, or a road beyond the intersection, may be blockedby congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, acollision between vehicles or between a vehicleand a pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.Page132 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 128A]128A Entering particular blockedcrossings A driver must not enter a bicycle crossing,children’s crossing, marked foot crossing or pedestriancrossing if the driver can not drive through the crossing becausethe crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, isblocked. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —The crossing, ora road beyondthe crossing, maybe blocked bycongested traffic, a disabled vehicle, acollision between vehicles or between a vehicleand a pedestrian, or a fallen load on the road. Division 2Keeping to the left 129Keeping to the far left side of aroad (1) A driver on a road, other than amulti-lane road, must drive as near aspracticable to the far left side of the road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) This sectiondoes not apply to the rider of a motorbike. (3)Inthis section— road does not includea road-related area. 130 Keeping to the left on a multi-laneroad (1) This section applies to a driverdriving on a multi-lane road if—(a) the speed limit applying to the driverfor the length of road where the driver is driving is over80km/h; or (b) a keep left unless overtaking signapplies to the length of road where the driver isdriving. (2) The driver must not drive in the rightlane unless— (a) the driver is— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 133
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 130] (i)turning right or making a U-turn from thecentre of the road; and (ii)giving a right change of direction signal;or (b) the driver is overtaking; or(c) a left lane must turn left sign orleft traffic lane arrows apply to any other lane and the driveris not turning left; or (d)the driver isrequired todrive inthe right laneunder section 159;or (e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction;or (f) the traffic in each other lane iscongested; or (g) the traffic in every lane iscongested; or (h) the rightlane isa special purposelane inwhich thedriver, underanother provisionof this regulation, ispermitted to drive; or (i)there are only 2 marked lanes and the leftlane is a slow vehicle turn out lane. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) A keep leftunless overtaking sign on a multi-lane road appliestothe length of road beginning at the sign and ending at thenearest of the following—(a) an end keep left unless overtakingsign on the road; (b) a traffic sign or road marking on theroad that indicates that the road is no longer a multi-laneroad; (c) if the road ends at a T-intersectionor dead end—the end of the road. (4)Inthis section— lane , for a driver,means a marked lane for vehicles travelling inthe same directionas the driver,but does notinclude aspecial purpose lane in which the driver isnot permitted to drive. Page 134Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 131]slowvehicle turn out lane means a marked lane, or the partof a marked lane,to which aslow vehicleturn outlane signapplies. Note— A slow vehicle turn out lane isdesigned for slow-moving vehicles to move into toallow faster vehicles to pass in an adjacent marked lane.Examples —Keepleft unless overtaking sign End keep leftunless overtaking sign Slow vehicle turn out lane sign131 Keeping to the left of oncomingvehicles (1) A drivermust driveto the leftof any oncomingvehicle unless—(a) the driver is turning right at anintersection; and (b) the driver is passing an oncomingvehicle turning right at the intersection; and(c) there is no traffic sign or roadmarking indicating that the driver must pass to the left ofthe oncoming vehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. Current as at 7 April 2014Page135
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 131] (2)Thissection does not apply to the rider of a motorbike that is apostal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle orthe rider of an animal if— (a)therider is riding on a footpath, nature strip or sharedpath; and (b)therider is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature striporshared path under this regulation; and (c)either— (i)theoncoming vehicle is not on the footpath, nature strip or sharedpath; or (ii) the oncomingvehicle is not permitted, under this regulation, tobe on thefootpath, naturestrip orshared path. Examples— Example 1 Example 2Driving to the left of an oncomingvehicle Oncoming vehicles turning rightpassing to the right of each otherPage136 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 132]132 Keeping to the left of the centre of aroad or the dividing line (1)Adriver on a two-way road without a dividing line or medianstrip must drive to the left of the centreof the road, except as permitted under section 133, 139(1) or139A(1). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver on a road with a dividingline (except 2 continuous dividing lines)must driveto the leftof the dividingline, except aspermitted under section 134, 139(2) or 139A(2). Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2A) A driver on aroad with a single continuous dividing line, a singlecontinuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividingline or2 parallel continuous dividinglines mustnot drive across thedividing lines to perform a U-turn. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) A driver on aroad with 2 continuous dividing lines must driveto the leftof the dividinglines, exceptas permitted undersection 139(2) or 139A(2).Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) This section, and sections 133, 134,139(1) and (2) and 139A apply to a service road to which atwo-way sign applies as if it were a separateroad, but do not apply to any other service road.(5) In this section— roaddoesnot include a footpath, nature strip, bicycle path,separated footpath or shared path.Current as at 7 April 2014Page137
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 132] Example oftwo-way sign — Two-way sign Examples forsubsection (2) — Example 1 Driving to theleft of a single continuous dividing lineonly Example 2 Driving to theleft of a single continuous dividing line tothe left of a broken dividing line Page 138Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 132]Example 3 Driving to theleft of 2 parallel continuous dividing lines Examples forsubsection (2A) — Example 4 Driving across asingle continuous dividing line to perform a U-turn isnot permitted Example 5Driving across a single continuousdividing line to the left of a brokendividing line to perform a U-turn isnot permitted Current as at 7April 2014 Page 139
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 133] Example 6Driving across 2 parallel continuousdividing lines to perform a U-turn is not permitted133 Exceptions to keeping to the left ofthe centre of a road (1) This sectionapplies to a driver on a two-way road without a dividing line ormedian strip. (2) The driver may drive to the right ofthe centre of the road— (a) to overtakeanother driver; or (b) to enter or leave the road; or(c) to enter a part of the road of 1 kindfrom a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving toor from a service road or emergency stoppinglane). (3) The driver may also drive to the rightof the centre of the road if— (a)because of the width or condition of theroad, it is not practicable to drive to the left of thecentre of the road; and (b) the driver cando so safely. Page 140 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 134]134 Exceptions to keeping to the left of adividing line (1) This section applies to a driver on aroad with a dividing line. (2) If the dividingline is a single broken dividing line only, or abroken dividing line to the left of a singlecontinuous dividing line, the driver may drive to the right ofthe dividing line— (a) to overtake another driver; or(b) to perform a U-turn, unless the driveris prohibited from performing theU-turn underanother provisionof this regulation. (3)Ifthe dividing line is a single continuous or broken dividingline, or a broken dividing line to the leftor right of a single continuous dividing line, the drivermay drive to the right of the dividing line— (a)toenter or leave the road; or (b)toenter a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of theroadof another kind (for example, moving to or from aservice road or emergency stoppinglane). Examples —Example 1 Driving to theright of the centre of the road permitted—overtaking on aroad with a broken dividing line onlyExample 2 Driving to theright of the centre of the road permitted—overtaking on aroad with a broken dividing line to the left ofa single continuous dividing lineCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page141
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 134] Example 2ADriving across a single continuousdividing line is permitted to enter orleave the road Example2B Driving across a single continuousdividing line is permitted to leavethe road to enter a road-related areaExample 2C Driving across asingle continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividingline is permitted to enter or leave the roadPage142 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 135]Example 3 Driving to theright of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking ona road with a single continuous dividinglineonly Example 4 Driving to theright of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking on aroad with a single continuous dividing lineto the left of a broken dividing lineExample 5 Driving to theright of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking on aroad with 2 parallel continuous dividinglines 135 Keeping to the left of a medianstrip (1) A driver on a road with a median stripmust drive to the left of the median strip, unless the driveris— (a) entering or driving in a median stripparking area; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page143
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 136] (b)required to drive to the right of the medianstrip by a keep right sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— median strip does not includea painted island. Example —Keepright sign 136 Driving on a one-way serviceroad A driver on the part of the road that is aservice road (except a service road to which a two-way signapplies) must drive in the same direction as a vehicletravelling on the part of the road closest tothe service road must travel. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Page144 Two-way sign Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 137]137 Keeping off a dividing strip(1) A drivermust notdrive ona dividing strip,except aspermitted under this section or section139(4) or 139A(3). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver may drive on a dividing stripthat is at the same level as the road, and marked at each sideby a continuous line— (a) to enter orleave the road; or (b) to enter or leave an area on thedividing strip to which a parking control sign applies if thedriver is permitted to park in the area. (2A)Forsubsection (2), a dividing strip is taken to be at the samelevel as the road even if the dividing stripcontains 1 or more pavement bars or markers.(3) In this section— dividingstrip does not include a painted island.138 Keeping off a painted island(1) A driver must not drive on or over asingle continuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines, along aside of or surrounding a painted island,except aspermitted underthis sectionor section 139(4) or 139A(3).Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page145
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 138] Example— Painted island surrounded by 2parallel continuous lines In this example, vehicle B iscontravening the section. (2) A driver maydrive on or over a single continuous line along the side of orsurrounding a painted island for up to 50m— (a)toenter or leave the road; or (b)toenter a turning lane that begins immediately after thepainted island. (3)Subsection (2)(a)does notapply inthe case ofa painted island—(a) that separates a road that takesvehicles in 1 direction from anotherroad thattakes vehiclesin the samedirection at a place where the roads merge;or (b) that separates 1 part of a road fromother parts of the road to create a slip lane.Page146 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 139]Examples —Example 1 Painted islandseparating traffic flow in the same direction Example 2Painted island separating traffic flowin the same direction In examples 1 and2, vehicle B is contravening the section. 139Exceptions for avoiding obstructions on aroad (1) A driver on a two-way road without adividing line or median strip may drive to the right of thecentre of the road to avoid an obstructionif— (a) the driver has a clear view of anyapproaching traffic; and (b)itis necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances,forthe driver to drive to the right of the centre of theroadto avoid the obstruction; and (c)thedriver can do so safely. (2) A driver on aroad with a dividing line may drive to the rightofthe dividing line to avoid an obstruction if— (a)thedriver has a clear view of any approaching traffic;and (b) it is necessaryand reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the driverto drive to the right of the dividing line to avoid theobstruction; and Current as at 7 April 2014Page147
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 139A] (c)thedriver can do so safely. (3) For subsection(2), if the dividing line is a single continuousdividing lineto the leftof a brokendividing line,a single continuous dividingline onlyor 2 parallelcontinuous dividing lines,the hazard in driving to the right of the dividingline mustbe taken intoaccount indeciding whetherit is reasonable todrive to the right of the dividing line. (4)Adriver may drive on a dividing strip, or on or over a singlecontinuous line, or 2 parallel continuouslines, along a side of or surrounding a painted island, toavoid an obstruction if— (a) the driver has aclear view of any approaching traffic; and(b) it is necessary and reasonable todrive on the dividing strip or painted island to avoid theobstruction; and (c) the driver can do so safely.139A Exceptions for passing bicyclerider (1) A driver on a two-way road without adividing line or median strip may drive to the right of thecentre of the road to pass the rider of abicycle that is travelling in the same direction as thedriver if— (a)thedriver has a clear view of any approaching traffic;and (b) the driving isnecessary to comply with section 144A(1) for the passingof the rider; and (c) the driver can do so safely.(2) A driver on a road with a dividingline may drive to the right ofthe dividing lineto pass therider ofa bicycle thatis travelling in the same direction asthe driver if— (a) the driver has a clear view of anyapproaching traffic; and (b)thedriving is necessary to comply with section 144A(1)forthe passing of the rider; and Page 148Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 140](c) the driver can do so safely.(3) A driver may drive on a dividing stripthat is at the same level as the road, or on or over a singlecontinuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines,along aside ofor surrounding apainted island to passthe rider of a bicycle that istravelling inthe same direction as the driverif— (a) the driver has a clear view of anyapproaching traffic; and (b)thedriving is necessary to comply with section 144A(1)forthe passing of the rider; and (c)thedriver can do so safely. Note —Forthe requirement to give a left or right change of direction signal,see section 46 or 48. (4)Forsubsection (3), a dividing strip is taken to be at the samelevel as the road even if the dividing stripcontains 1 or more pavement bars or markers.Division 3 Overtaking 140Noovertaking unless safe to do so A driver mustnot overtake a vehicle unless— (a)thedriver has a clear view of any approaching traffic;and (b) the driver cansafely overtake the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 141 No overtakingetc. to the left of a vehicle (1)Adriver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not overtake avehicle to the left of the vehicleunless— Current as at 7 April 2014Page149
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 142] (a)thedriver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehiclecanbe safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left ofthevehicle; or (b) the vehicle is turning right, ormaking a U-turn from the centre ofthe road, andis giving aright changeof direction signal and it is safe toovertake to the left of the vehicle;or (c) the vehicle is stationary and can besafely overtaken to the left of the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) The rider of abicycle must not ride past, or overtake, to the left of avehicle that is turning left and is giving a left changeofdirection signal. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— turningright does not include making a hook turn.vehicle does not includea tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks,or any vehicledisplaying ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign. 142 No overtaking to the right of avehicle turning right etc. (1) Adriver mustnot overtake tothe right ofa vehicle ifthe vehicle is— (a)turning right or making a U-turn from thecentre of the road; and (b)giving a right change of directionsignal. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— turningright does not include making a hook turn.vehicle does not includea tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks,or any vehicledisplaying ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign. Page 150 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 143]143 Passing or overtaking a vehicledisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign(1) A drivermust notdrive past,or overtake, tothe left ofa vehicle displaying ado not overtaketurning vehiclesign, unless—(a) if the vehicle is turning left and isgiving a left change of direction signal— (i)thedriver is driving on a multi-lane road and it issafeto pass, or overtake, in a marked lane to the left of thevehicle; or (ii) it is otherwisesafe to pass, or overtake, to the left of the vehicle;or (b) otherwise— (i)thedriver is driving on a multi-lane road and it issafeto pass, or overtake, in a marked lane to the left of thevehicle; or (ii) thevehicle isturning right,or making aU-turn from the centreof the road, and is giving a right change ofdirection signal and it is safe to pass, or overtake, to theleft of the vehicle; or (iii) the vehicle isstationary and it is safe to pass, or overtake, to theleft of the vehicle; or (iv) it is otherwisesafe to pass, or overtake, to the left of thevehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A drivermust notdrive past,or overtake, tothe right ofa vehicle displaying a do not overtaketurning vehicle sign if the vehicle isturning right, or making a U-turn from the centre ofthe road, andis giving aright changeof direction signal,unless it is safe to do so.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —A driver drivingon a multi-laneroad who isturning rightat an intersection towhich a right turn only sign applies may drive past aCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page151
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 144] vehicledisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign that isturning right from another marked lane, and giving aright change of direction signal, if it is safe to do so.(3) In this section— turningright does not include making a hook turn.Examples of do not overtake turning vehiclesigns — 144 Keeping a safedistance when overtaking Subject to section 144A(1), a driverovertaking a vehicle— (a) must pass thevehicle at a sufficient distance to avoid a collision withthe vehicle or obstructing the path of the vehicle;and (b) must notreturn tothe marked laneor line oftraffic wherethe vehicle istravelling untilthe driver isa sufficient distance past the vehicleto avoid a collision with the vehicle or obstructing thepath of the vehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. 144A Keeping a safe lateral distance whenpassing bicycle rider (1)Thedriver of a motor vehicle passing the rider of a bicyclethatis travelling in the same direction as the driver must passthebicycle at a sufficient distance from the bicycle.Maximum penalty—40 penalty units.Note — Page 152Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 145]Section 129requires therider ofa bicycle ona road, otherthan a multi-lane road,to drive as near as practicable to the far left side of theroad. (2)A sufficient distance from thebicycle is— (a) if theapplicable speed limit is not more than 60km/h—alateral distance from the bicycle of atleast 1m; or (b) if theapplicable speedlimit ismore than60km/h—a lateral distancefrom the bicycle of at least 1.5m. (3)Forsubsection (2), the lateral distance is the distance betweenthefollowing points— (a) the furthermost point to the left onthe driver’s vehicle or any projection from the vehicle(whether or not attached to the vehicle); (b)the furthermost pointto the righton the bicycle,any bicycle trailertowed bythe bicycle, therider orany passenger in or on the trailer.Example of what is part of a bicycle forparagraph (b) — a basket or pannier bags attached tothe bicycle Example of what is not part of a bicycle forparagraph (b) — a flag or stick, whether or notflexible, attached to the bicycle, that projectssideways from the bicycle 145 Driver beingovertaken not to increase speed If a driver isovertaking another driver on a two-way road by crossing adividing line, or crossing to the right of the centreof the road,the other drivermust notincrease thespeed atwhich the driver is driving until the firstdriver— (a) has passed the other driver;and (b) has returned to the marked lane orline of traffic where the other driver is driving;and (c) is asufficient distancein front ofthe other driverto avoid a collision. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page153
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 146] Division 4Driving in marked lanes or lines oftraffic 146Driving within a single marked lane or lineof traffic (1) A driveron a multi-lane roadmust driveso the driver’svehicle is completely in a marked lane,unless the driver is— (a) entering a partof the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of anotherkind (for example, moving to or from a service road ora shoulder of the road); or (b)entering or leaving the road; or(c) moving from 1 marked lane to anothermarked lane; or (d) avoiding an obstruction; or(e) obeying a traffic control deviceapplying to the marked lane; or (f)permitted to drive in more than 1 markedlane under this regulation; or (g)passing therider ofa bicycle thatis travelling inthe same direction as the driver and thedriver’s vehicle is not completely in a marked lane in order tocomply with section 144A(1) for the passing of therider. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver on a road with 2 or morelines of traffic travelling in thesame directionas the driver,but without markedlanes, must drive sothe driver’s vehicle is completely in a single lineoftraffic unless— (a) it is not practicable to drivecompletely in a single line of traffic;or (b) the driver is entering a part of theroad of 1 kind from a part of the road of another kind (forexample, moving to or from a service road or a shoulder of theroad); or (c) the driver is entering or leaving theroad; or Page 154 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 147](d) the driver is moving from 1 line oftraffic to another line of traffic; or (e)thedriver is avoiding an obstruction; or (f)the driver ispassing abicycle thatis travelling inthe same direction as the driver and thedriver’s vehicle is not completely ina single lineof traffic inorder tocomply withsection 144A(1)for the passingof the rider.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.147 Moving from 1 marked lane to anothermarked lane across a continuous line separating thelanes (1) A driver on a multi-lane road must notmove from 1 marked lane toanother markedlane bycrossing acontinuous lineseparating the lanes unless—(a) the driver is avoiding an obstruction;or (b) the driver is obeying a trafficcontrol device applying to the first marked lane; or(c) the driveris permitted todrive inboth markedlanes under subsection(2); or (d) either of the marked lanes is aspecial purpose lane in which thedriver ispermitted todrive underthis regulation andthe driver ismoving toor from thespecial purpose lane. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver on amulti-lane road may move from 1 marked lane toanother markedlane bycrossing acontinuous lineseparating the lanes if— (a)the driver makesthe move toapproach orenter anintersection from the multi-lane road andsection 28(2) or 32(2) applies to the driver for thepurpose of making the move; or (b)the driver makesthe move toapproach orenter aroundabout from the multi-lane road andsection 111(8) Current as at 7 April 2014Page155
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 148] or (9) appliesto the driver for the purpose of making the move; or(c) both of the following apply—(i) the driver is passing the rider of abicycle that is travelling in the same direction as thedriver and the movement is necessary to comply withsection 144A(1) for the passing of the rider;(ii) the driver canperform the movement safely. 148Giving way when moving from 1 marked lane orline of traffic to another marked lane or line oftraffic (1) A driver who is moving from 1 markedlane (whether or not the lane is ending) to another markedlane must give way to any vehicle travelling in the samedirection as the driver in the marked lane towhich the driver is moving. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 156 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 148]Examples —Example 1 In these examples,vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. Example 2(2) A driver on a road with 2 or morelines of traffic travelling in the samedirection as the driver, and who is moving from 1lineof traffic to another line of traffic, must give way to anyvehicle travelling in the same direction asthe driver in the line of traffic to which the driver ismoving. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) Subsection (2) does not apply to adriver if the line of traffic in which the driveris driving is merging with the line of traffic to which thedriver is moving. Current as at 7 April 2014Page157
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 148A] 148AGiving way when moving within a singlemarked lane If a driver diverges to the left or rightwithin a marked lane, the driver must give way to anyvehicle that is in the lane. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 149 Giving way whenlines of traffic merge into a single line of trafficAdriver in a line of traffic that is merging with 1 or morelines of traffic travelling in the same directionas the driver must give way to a vehicle in another line oftraffic if any part of the vehicle is ahead of the driver’svehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Giving way when lines of traffic merge intoa single line of traffic In this example, vehicle B must giveway to vehicle A. 150 Driving on or across a continuouswhite edge line (1) A driver must not drive on or over acontinuous white edge line on a road unless subsection (1A)or (1B) applies to the driver. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 158 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 150](1A) A driver maydrive on or over a continuous white edge line onaroad if the driver is— (a) overtaking avehicle that is turning right, or making aU-turn from the centre of the road, and isgiving a right change of direction signal; or(b) driving aslow-moving vehicle,and it isnecessary forthedriver to drive on or over the edge line to allow thevehicle to be overtaken or passed by anothervehicle; or (c) driving a vehicle that is too wide, ortoo long, to drive on the road without driving on or overthe edge line; or (d) avoiding an obstruction.(1B) A driver maydrive on or over a continuous white edge line onaroad for up to 100m if the driver is— (a)turning at an intersection; or(b) entering or leaving the road;or (c) entering a part of the road of 1 kindfrom a part of the road of another kind (for example, moving toor from a service road,a shoulder ofthe road oran emergency stopping lane);or (d) stopping at the side of the road(including any shoulder of the road). (2)Thissection does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.(3) For this section, a driver drives overa continuous white edge line on a road if— (a)fora line on the far left side of the road—the driver’svehicle is completely or partly to the leftof the line; or (b) for a line on the far right side ofthe road—the driver’s vehicle is completely or partly to theright of the line. Current as at 7 April 2014Page159
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 151] 151Riding a motorbike or bicycle alongside morethan 1 other rider (1)Therider of a motorbike or bicycle must not ride on a roadthatis not a multi-lane road alongside more than 1 other rider,unless subsection (3) applies to therider. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) The rider of a motorbike or bicyclemust not ride in a marked lane alongsidemore than1 other riderin the markedlane, unlesssubsection (3) applies to the rider. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The rider of amotorbike or bicycle may ride alongside more than 1 otherrider if the rider is overtaking the other riders.(4) If the rider of a motorbike or bicycleis riding on a road that is not a multi-laneroad alongside another rider, or in a marked lane alongsideanother rider in the marked lane, the rider mustridenot over 1.5m from the other rider. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5) In thissection— road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes abicycle path, a shared path and any shoulderof the road. Division 5 Obeying overheadlane control devices applying to marked lanes152 Complying with overhead lane controldevices (1) A driver in a marked lane to which anoverhead lane control device applies must comply with thissection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the device displays an illuminatedred diagonal cross or is a traffic signdisplaying areddiagonal cross, thedriver mustnotdrive in the marked lane past the device. Page 160Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 152](3) If thedevice displaysa flashing illuminated reddiagonal cross, thedriver must leave the marked lane as soon as it issafeto do so. (4) If the device displays an illuminatedwhite, green or yellow arrow pointing downwards or indicating1 or more directions, the driver may drive in the markedlane past the device. Example —Overhead lane control device applying tomarked lanes (5) Also, ifthe device displaysa speed limitsign (variableilluminated message sign), the driver maydrive in the marked lane past the device. Note— See also section 20.(6) A lane control ends sign on a road hasthe effect that once the driver has passed the sign, theoverhead lane control device forwhich thesign isdisplayed nolonger regulateswhich marked lanes thedriver may or must drive in or must leave. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 161
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 153] Example— Lane control ends signDivision 6 Driving inmarked lanes designated for special purposes153 Bicycle lanes (1)Adriver (except the rider of a bicycle) must notdrive in a bicycle lane,unless thedriver ispermitted todrive inthe bicycle lane under this section orsection 158. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If stopping or parking is permitted ata place in a bicycle lane under this regulation, a driver maydrive for up to 50m in the bicycle lane to stop or park at thatplace. (3) A driver may drive for up to 50m in abicycle lane if the driver is— (a)driving a bus or taxi; and(b) dropping off, or picking up,passengers. (4) A bicyclelane isa marked lane,or the partof a markedlane— (a)beginning at a bicycle lane sign applying tothe lane; and (b) ending at the nearest of thefollowing— Page 162 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 154](i) an end bicycle lane sign applying tothe lane; (ii) an intersection(unless the lane is at the unbroken sideof the continuing roadat a T-intersection orcontinued across the intersection by brokenlines); (iii) if the road endsat a dead end—the end of the road. Examples— Bicycle lane sign End bicycle lanesign 154 Bus lanes (1)Adriver must not drive in a bus lane, unless the driver is—(a) driving— (i)abus; or (ii) a bicycle ortaxi; or (b) permitted to drive in the bus laneunder section 158. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A bus laneis amarked lane, or the part of a marked lane— (a)beginning at a bus lane sign (whether or notthere is also a bus lane road marking) and ending at thenearest of the following— (i)anend bus lane sign; (ii) a traffic signthat indicates the beginning of another special purposelane; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page163
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 155] (b)beginning at a bus lane road marking (ifthere is no bus lane sign) and ending at the nextintersection. (3) In this section— bus lane roadmarking means a road marking consisting of—(a) the letters ‘BL’; or(b) the words ‘bus lane’; or(c) the words ‘bus only’.Examples —Buslane sign End bus lane sign 155Tramlanes (1) A driver must not drive in a tramlane, unless the driver is— (a)driving— (i)atram, tram recovery vehicle or bus; or (ii)abicycle, bus or taxi; or (b) permitted todrive in the tram lane under this section or section158. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver may drive in a tram lane ifthe driver is driving a truck and it is necessary for thedriver to drive in the tram lane to reach a placeto drop off, or pick up, passengers or goods. (3)A tram lane is a part of aroad with tram tracks that— Page 164Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 155A](a) is between a tram lane sign and an endtram lane sign; and (b) is marked alongthe left side of the tracks (when facing thedirection oftravel ofa tram onthe tracks) bya continuous yellow line parallel to thetracks. Examples —Tramlane sign End tram lane sign Tram lane155A Tramways (1)Adriver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicleor bus) mustnot drive ina tramway, unlessthe driver ispermitted to drive in the tramway undersubsection (2). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver may drive in a tramwayif— Current as at 7 April 2014Page165
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 155A] (a)itis necessary for the driver to drive in the tramway toavoid an obstruction; and(b) when driving in the tramway, thedriver does not move into the path of an approaching tramor bus travelling in the tramway. (3)A tramway is a part of aroad with tram tracks that— (a)is between atramway signand an endtramway sign;and (b) is marked alongthe left side of the tracks (when facing thedirection oftravel ofa tram onthe tracks) byeither— (i)2continuous yellow lines parallel to the tracks; or(ii) astructure (forexample, adividing strip,pedestrian refuge, traffic island, row ofbollards or separation kerb),whether ornot the structureis also being used to indicate a safetyzone; but does includeany part ofthe road wherevehicles arepermitted to cross the tramway.(4) For thepurposes ofsubsection (3)(b)(i), aline isto be considered tobe continuous despiteany break init that isdesigned to permit vehicles to cross thetramway. Examples —Tramway sign Page 166Endtramway sign Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 156]Tramway with double yellow lineTramway with separation kerb156 Transit lanes (1)Adriver must not drive in a transit lane, unless—(a) the driver is driving—(i) a bicycle, bus, motorbike, taxi ortram; or (ii) if the transitlane sign applying to the transit lane is a transit lane(T2) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 1 other person;or (iii) if the transitlane sign applying to the transit lane is a transit lane(T3) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 2 other people;or (b) the driver is permitted to drive inthe transit lane under section 158. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Atransit lane is a markedlane, or the part of a marked lane— (a)beginning at a transit lane sign; and(b) ending at an end transit lanesign. Current as at 7 April 2014Page167
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 157] Examples oftransit lane signs — Transit lane (T2) signExamples of end transit lane signs— Transit lane (T3) signEndtransit lane (T2) sign End transit lane (T3) sign157 Truck lanes (1)Adriver must not drive in a truck lane, unless— (a)thedriver is driving a truck; or (b)thedriver is permitted to drive in the truck lane undersection 158. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Atruck lane is a markedlane, or the part of a marked lane— (a)beginning at a truck lane sign; and(b) ending at an end truck lanesign. Page 168 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 158]Examples —Trucklane sign End truck lane sign 158Exceptions to driving in special purposelanes etc. (1) The driver of any vehicle may drivefor up to the permitted distance in a bicycle lane, bus lane,tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if it is necessary for thedriver to drive in the lane— (a)toenter or leave the road; or (b)toenter a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of theroadof another kind (for example, moving to or from aservice road, the shoulder of the road or anemergency stopping lane); or (c)toovertake a vehicle that is— (i)turning right, or making a U-turn from thecentre of the road; and (ii)giving a right change of direction signal;or (d) to enter a marked lane, or a part ofthe road where there is room for a line of traffic, otherthan animals, bicycles, motorbikes or motorised wheelchairs,from the side of the road. (2)The driver ofany vehicle maydrive ina bicycle lane,bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or trucklane if— (a) it is necessary for the driver todrive in the lane to avoid an obstruction; or Current as at 7April 2014 Page 169
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 159] (b)information on or with a traffic signapplying to the lane indicates that the driver may drive inthe lane. (3) It is a defence to the prosecution ofa driver for an offence against aprovision ofthis divisionfor driving ina bicycle lane, bus lane,tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if— (a)itis necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to stop ataplace in the lane; and (b) either—(i) the driver is permitted to stop atthat place under this regulation; or (ii)itis a defence under section 165 for the driver tostopat that place; and (c) if the lane is a bicycle lane—thedriver drives in the lane for no more than the permitteddistance. (4) In this section— permitteddistance means— (a)fora bicycle lane or a tram lane—50m; or (b)forany other lane—100m. 159 Marked lanes required to be used byparticular kinds of vehicles (1)Ifinformation on or with a traffic sign applying to a lengthof road indicates that a vehicle of aparticular kind must drive in aparticular markedlane, adriver drivinga vehicle ofthat kind on thelength of road must drive in the indicated lane,unless— (a)thedriver is avoiding an obstruction; or (b)thedriver is obeying a traffic control device applying totheindicated lane; or (c) the driver is permitted to drive inthe indicated lane and also another marked lane under thisregulation; or Page 170 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 160](d) the driver is intending to turn offthe road or to make a U-turn and, in order to do so safelywithout disrupting other vehicles on the road, it is necessaryto position the vehicle inanother lanebefore startingor making theturn. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Atraffic signmentioned inthis sectionthat ison a roadapplies to the length of road beginning atthe sign and ending at the nearest of the following—(a) a traffic sign or road marking on theroad that indicates that the first traffic sign no longerapplies; (b) the next intersection on theroad; (c) if the road ends at a T-intersectionor dead end—the end of the road. Examplesof a trafficsign mentioned inthe section anda traffic signindicating that the first traffic sign nolonger applies — Trucks use left lane signEndtrucks use left lane sign Division 7 Passing tramsand safety zones 160 Passing or overtaking a tram that isnot at or near the left side of the road (1)Thissection applies to a driver driving on a road with tramtracks that are not at or near the far leftside of the road. (2) The driver must not drive past, orovertake, a tram to the right of the tram,unless a traffic sign or a road marking indicatesCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page171
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 161] that the drivermay drive past, or overtake, the tram to the rightofthe tram. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The driver must not drive past, orovertake, a tram if the tram is turning leftor is giving a left change of direction signal, unless—(a) the driver is turning left; and(b) there is no danger of a collision withthe tram. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 161 Passing or overtaking a tram at ornear the left side of a road (1)Thissection applies to a driver driving on a road with tramtracks at or near the far left side of theroad. (2) The driver must not drive past, orovertake, a tram to the left ofthe tram unlessthe driver isturning leftand there isno danger of a collision with thetram. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The driver must not drive past, orovertake, a tram if the tram is turning rightor is giving a right change of direction signal.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 162 Driving past a safety zone(1) A driver driving past a safetyzone— (a) must not drive on the safety zone;and Page 172 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 163](b) must drive to the left of the safetyzone at a speed that does not put at risk the safety of anypedestrian crossing the road to or from the safety zone.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A safetyzone is an area of a road— (a)at aplace with safety zone signs at or near a tram stop;and (b) indicatedby a structureon the road(for example,a dividing strip, pedestrian refuge ortraffic island). Example —Safety zone sign 163Driving past the rear of a stopped tram at atram stop (1) This section applies if—(a) a driver is driving behind the rear ofa tram travelling in the same direction as the driver;and (b) the tram stops at a tram stop, otherthan a tram stop at the far left side of the road; and(c) there isno safety zone,dividing stripor traffic islandbetween thetram andthe part ofthe road wherethe driver is driving. (2)Thedriver must stop before passing the rear of the tram.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) After stopping under subsection (2),the driver must not drive past the tram if— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 173
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking andother driving rules [s 164] (a)oneor more of the doors on the side of the tram closesttothe driver are open or opening; or (b)apedestrian is entering or crossing the road between thetramtracks and the far left side of the road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) Also, afterstopping under subsection (2), if the tram remainsatthe tram stop and subsection (3)(a) and (b) do not apply,the driver must not drive past the tram at aspeed over 10km/h. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5) Subsections (2) to (4) do not apply toa driver if the driver is directed to drive past the tram by anauthorised officer. (6) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 164 Stopping beside a stopped tram at atram stop (1) This section applies if—(a) a driveris driving alongside, orovertaking, atram travelling inthe same direction as the driver; and (b)thetram stops at a tram stop, other than a tram stop atthefar left side of the road; and (c)there isno safety zone,dividing stripor traffic islandbetween thetram andthe part ofthe road wherethe driver is driving. (2)Thedriver must stop when the tram stops. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) After stoppingunder subsection (2), the driver must not drive past, orovertake, the tram if— (a) one or more ofthe doors on the side of the tram closest to the driverare open or opening; or (b) a pedestrian isentering or crossing the road between the tram tracks andthe far left side of the road. Page 174Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 11 Keepingleft, overtaking and other driving rules [s 164AA]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) Also, after stopping under subsection(2), if the tram remains at the tram stop and subsection (3)(a)and (b) do not apply, the driver mustnot drive past,or overtake, thetram ata speed over10km/h. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5) Subsections (2) to (4) do not apply toa driver if the driver is directed to drive past the tram by anauthorised officer. (6) In this section— tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 164AA Staying stopped if a tram comes frombehind a stopped driver and stops (1)Thissection applies if— (a) a driver is stopped beside a tramstop; and (b) a tram stops at the tram stop, otherthan at the far left side of the road; and(c) there isno safety zone,dividing stripor traffic islandbetween thetram andthe part ofthe road wherethe driver is driving. (2)Thedriver must not proceed if— (a)oneor more of the doors on the side of the tram closesttothe driver are open or opening; or (b)apedestrian is entering or crossing the road between thetramtracks and the far left side of the road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) If the tramremains at the tram stop and subsection (2)(a) and(b)do not apply, the driver must not drive past the tram at aspeed over 10km/h. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) Subsections (2)and (3) do not apply to a driver if the driver isdirected to drive past the tram by anauthorised officer. Current as at 7 April 2014Page175
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 164A] (5)Inthis section— tram includes a bustravelling along tram tracks. Part 12Restrictions on stopping andparking Division 1General 164AMinortraffic offences For section 108 of the Act,definition minor traffic offence , theoffences in this part are prescribed.165 Stopping in an emergency etc. or tocomply with another provision It is a defenceto the prosecution of a driver for an offence against aprovision of this part if— (a) the driver stopsat a particular place, or in a particular way,to avoid acollision, andthe driver stopsfor no longer than isnecessary to avoid the collision; or (b)thedriver stops at a particular place, or in a particularway, becausethe driver’s vehicleis disabled, andthe driver stopsfor no longerthan isnecessary forthe vehicle to be moved safely to a placewhere the driver is permitted to park the vehicle under the Act;or (c) the driver stops at a particularplace, or in a particular way, to deal with a medical or otheremergency, or to assist adisabled vehicle,and the driverstops forno longer than is necessary in thecircumstances; or (d) the driver stops at a particularplace, or in a particular way, because the condition of thedriver, a passenger, or the driver’s vehicle makes itnecessary for the driver to Page 176Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 166]stopin the interests of safety, and the driver stops for nolonger than is necessary in thecircumstances; or (e) the driver stops at a particularplace, or in a particular way, to comply with this regulation,and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary tocomply with the other provision. Example forparagraph (e) — If a driver stops at an intersectionat a stop line, stop sign, or traffic lights,or to give way to a vehicle, the driver does notcontravene section 170 (Stopping in or nearan intersection). 166 Application of part to bicyclesThispart does not apply to a bicycle that is parked at a bicyclerailor in a bicycle rack. Division 2 No stopping andparking signs and road markings 167Nostopping signs A driver must not stop on a length of roador in an area to which a no stopping sign applies.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Examples of no stopping signs— No stopping sign (for a length ofroad) Current as at 7 April 2014Nostopping sign (for an area) Page177
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 168] 168Noparking signs (1) The driver of a vehicle must not stopon a length of road or in an area to which a no parking signapplies, unless the driver— (a)isdropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods; and(b) does not leave the vehicle unattended;and (c) completes thedropping off,or picking up,of the passengers orgoods, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in anycase, within the required time after stopping. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) For thissection, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if thedriver leavesthe vehicle sothe driver isover 3mfrom theclosest point of the vehicle.(3) In this section— requiredtime means— (a)ifinformation on or with the sign indicates a time—theindicated time; or (b)ifthere is no indicated time—2 minutes; or (c)ifthere is no indicated time, or the indicated time is lessthan5 minutes, and section 206 applies to the driver—5minutes. Examples of noparking signs — No parking sign (for a length ofroad) Page 178 No parking sign(for an area) Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 169]169 No stopping on a road with a yellowedge line A driver must not stop at the side of a roadmarked with a continuous yellow edge line.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Division 3 Stopping atintersections and crossings 170Stopping in or near an intersection(1) A driver must not stop at a place inan intersection unless— (a) thedriver ispermitted tostop atthe place underthis regulation;or (b) the intersection is a T-intersectionwithout traffic lights and thedriver stopsalong thecontinuous sideof the continuing roadat the intersection. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) A driver must not stop on a roadwithin 20m from the nearest pointof an intersecting roadat an intersection withtraffic lights, unlessthe driver— (a) stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (3) However, subsection (2) does not applyif a no stopping sign is installed within 20m from thenearest point. Example —If a nostopping signis installed 6mfrom the nearestpoint ofan intersecting road to which subsection(2) would otherwise apply, it is not an offenceagainst subsection (2) for a driver to stop within 20m, butmorethan 6m, from the nearest point. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 179
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 170] (4)Adriver must not stop on a road within 10m from the nearestpoint of an intersecting road at anintersection without traffic lights,unless— (a) the driver— (i)stops at a place on a length of road, or inan area, to which a parking control sign applies;and (ii) ispermitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation; or (b)if the intersection isa T-intersection—the driverstops along thecontinuous side of the continuing road at the intersection. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5) However,subsection (4) does not apply if a no stopping signisinstalled within 10m from the nearest point. (6)Forthis section, distances are measured— (a)inthe direction in which the driver is driving; and(b) as shown in— (i)forsubsection (2)—example 1; or (ii)forsubsection (4)—example 2. (7) In thissection— road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Page 180Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 171]Examples —Example 1 Measurement ofdistance—intersection with traffic lights Example 2Measurement ofdistance—T-intersection without traffic lights171 Stopping on or near a children’scrossing (1) A driver must not— (a)stopon a children’s crossing; or (b)stopon a road within 20m before a children’s crossingor10m after a children’s crossing, unless the driver—(i) stops at a place on a length of road,or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies;and (ii) ispermitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) For thissection, distances are measured— (a)inthe direction in which the driver is driving; and(b) as shown in example 1 or 2.(3) In this section— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 181
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 172] roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Examples— Example 1 Measurement ofdistance—children’s crossing with red and white postsExample 2 Measurement ofdistance—children’s crossing with 2 parallel continuousor broken lines 172Stopping on or near a pedestrian crossing(except at an intersection) (1)Adriver must not stop on a pedestrian crossing that is not atanintersection, or on the road within 20m before the crossingand10m after the crossing, unless the driver— (a)stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) For this section, distances aremeasured— (a) in the direction in which the driveris driving; and (b) as shown in the example.(3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Page 182Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 173]Example —Measurement of distance—pedestriancrossing 173 Stopping on or near a marked footcrossing (except at an intersection) (1)Adriver must not stop on a marked foot crossing that is notat an intersection, or on the road within 10mbefore the traffic lights pole nearest to the driver at thecrossing and 3m after the crossing, unless thedriver— (a) stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) For this section, distances aremeasured— (a) in the direction in which the driveris driving; and (b) as shown in the example.(3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 183
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 174] Example— Measurement of distance—marked footcrossing 174 Stopping on or near a bicycle crossing(except at an intersection) (1)This sectionapplies toa bicycle crossingthat isnot at anintersection. (2)A driver drivingalong theroad onwhich thecrossing islocated must not stop on the crossing, or onthe road within 10m before thetraffic lightsnearest tothe driver atthe crossing and 3m after the crossing,unless the driver— (a) stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (3) For this section, distances aremeasured— (a) in the direction in which the driveris driving; and (b) as shown in the example.(4) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Page 184Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 175]Example —Measurement of distance—bicycle crossinglights 175 Stopping on or near a levelcrossing (1) A driver must not stop on a levelcrossing, or on a road within 20m before thenearest rail or track to the driver approaching thecrossing and20m after thenearest railor track tothe driver leaving the crossing, unlessthe driver— (a) stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) For thissection, distancesare measured asshown inthe example. (3)Inthis section— road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 185
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 176] Example— Measurement of distance—levelcrossing Division 4 Stopping onclearways and freeways and in emergencystopping lanes 176Stopping on a clearway (1)A driver mustnot stop ona length ofroad, otherthan aroad-related area, to which a clearway signapplies, unless the driver is— (a)driving a bus or taxi; and(b) dropping off, or picking up,passengers. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A clearway sign applies, for the daysor times indicated on the sign, to a length of road beginning atthe sign and ending at the nearest of the following—(a) a clearway sign on the road thatindicates different days or times; (b)anend clearway sign on the road; (c)theend of the road. Page 186 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 177]Examples —Clearway sign End clearwaysigns 177 Stopping on a freeway(1) A driver must not stop on a freeway,unless the driver stops in an emergency stopping lane.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A freewayis alength of road to which a freeway sign applies. (3)Afreeway sign on a road applies to a length of road beginningatthe sign (including any road into which the length of roadmerges) and ending at the next end freewaysign on the road. Examples of freeway signs— Current as at 7 April 2014Page187
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 178] Example of endfreeway sign — 178 Stopping in anemergency stopping lane A driver (except the rider of abicycle) must not stop in an emergencystopping lane unless— (a) the condition ofthe driver, a passenger or the driver’s vehicle,or any otherfactor, makesit necessary ordesirable forthe driver tostop inthe emergency stopping lane inthe interests of safety; and (b)the driver stopsfor no longer thanis necessary inthe circumstances. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Division 5 Stopping inzones for particular vehicles 179Stopping in a loading zone(1) A driver must not stop in a loadingzone, unless the driver is driving— (a)abus that is dropping off, or picking up, passengers; or(b) a truck that is dropping off, orpicking up, passengers or goods; or (c)a motor vehicledisplaying acommercial vehicleidentification label issued by the localgovernment for the local government area in which theloading zone is situated; or Page 188Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 179](d) another motor vehicle that is—(i) dropping off, or picking up, goods;or (ii) dropping off, orpicking up, passengers. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) A driverwho is permittedto stop ina loading zoneunder subsection(1)(a), (b) or (c) must not stay continuously in thezonefor longer than— (a) 30 minutes; or (b)if information onor with theloading zonesigns applyingto the loadingzone indicatesanother time—theindicated time. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2A) Adriver whois permitted tostop ina loading zoneunder subsection(1)(d)(i) must not stay continuously in the zone forlonger than— (a)20minutes; or (b) if information onor with theloading zonesigns applyingto the loadingzone indicatesanother time—theindicated time. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2B) Adriver whois permitted tostop ina loading zoneunder subsection (1)(d)(ii) mustnotstay continuously inthe zone for longer than2 minutes. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) A loadingzone is a length of a road to which a loadingzone sign applies. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 189
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 180] Example— Loading zone sign 180Stopping in a truck zone (1)Adriver must not stop in a truck zone, unless the driver isdriving a truck that is dropping off, orpicking up, passengers or goods. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Atruck zone is a length of aroad to which a truck zone sign applies.Example —Truck zone sign 181Stopping in a works zone (1)Adriver must not stop in a works zone, unless the driver isdriving a vehicle that is engaged inconstruction work in or near the zone. Page 190Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 182]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A workszone is a length of a road to which a works zonesign applies. Example— Works zone sign 182Stopping in a taxi zone (1)A driver mustnot stop ina taxi zone,unless thedriver isdriving a taxi. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Ataxizone is a length of a road to which a taxi zonesign applies. Example— Taxi zone sign Current as at 7April 2014 Page 191
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 183] 183Stopping in a bus zone (1)A driver mustnot stop ina bus zone,unless thedriver isdriving a bus (except a bus of a kind thatis not permitted to stop in the bus zone by information on orwith the bus zone sign applying to the bus zone).Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A buszone isa length ofa road towhich abus zone signapplies. Example— Bus zone sign 184Section number not used 185Stopping in a permit zone(1) A driver must not stop in a permitzone, unless the driver’s vehicle displays a current permitissued under this regulation that permits thevehicle to stop in the zone. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Apermit zone is a length of aroad to which a permit zone signapplies. Page 192 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 186]Example —Permit zone sign 186Stopping in a mail zone (1)Adriver must not stop in a mail zone. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Amailzone is a length of a road to which a mail zonesign applies. Example— Mail zone sign Current as at 7April 2014 Page 193
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 187] Division 6Other places where stopping isrestricted 187Stopping in a bus lane, tram lane, tramway,transit lane, truck lane or on tram tracks(1) A driver must not stop in a bus lane,transit lane or truck lane, unless thedriver— (a) is— (i)driving a bus or taxi; and(ii) dropping off, orpicking up, passengers; or (b) is permitted todrive in the lane under this regulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver (exceptthe driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a bus) mustnot stop in a tram lane, a tramway or on tram tracks.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.188 Stopping in a shared zoneAdriver must not stop in a shared zone unless— (a)thedriver stops at a place on a length of road, or in anarea, towhich aparking controlsign appliesand the driver ispermitted to stop at that place under the Act; or(b) the driver— (i)stops in a parking bay; and(ii) is permitted tostop in the parking bay under this regulation;or (c) the driver is dropping off, or pickingup, passengers or goods; or (d)the driver isengaged inthe door-to-door deliveryor collection ofgoods, orin the collection ofwaste orgarbage. Page 194Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 189]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.189 Double parking (1)Adriver must not stop on a road if to do so would put anypart of the vehicle that the driver is drivingbetween a vehicle that is parked on the road and the centreof the road. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver does not contravenesubsection (1) by parking on the sideof the road,or in amedian stripparking area,in accordance with section 210.Examples —Example 1 Double parked ona two-way road without a dividing line Example 2Double parked on a two-way roadwitha centre dividing line Current as at 7 April 2014Page195
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 190] Example 3Example 4 Double parked onthe right side of a Double parked on the left side of aone-way road with no vehicles parkedon one-way road with other vehicleslawfully the left side of the road parked on theright side of the road In the examples, a vehicle marked withan ‘X’ is stopped in contravention of this section.190 Stopping in or near a safetyzone (1) A driver must not stop in a safetyzone, or on a road within 10m before or after a safety zone,unless the driver— (a) stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) For this section, distances aremeasured— (a) in the direction in which the driveris driving; and (b) from the end of the structure;and (c) as shown in example 2.(3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Page 196Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 191]Examples —Example 1 Safety zonesign Example 2 Measurement ofdistance—safety zone In example 2, the vehicles marked with an ‘X’are stopped in contravention of this section. 191Stopping near an obstructionAdriver must not stop on a road near an obstruction on theroadin a position that obstructs traffic on the road.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.192 Stopping on a bridge or in a tunneletc. (1) A driver must not stop on a bridge,causeway, ramp or similar structure unless— (a)theroad is at least as wide on the structure as it is oneachof the approaches; or (b) thedriver— (i) stops at a place on a length of road,or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies;and (ii) ispermitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver mustnot stop in a tunnel or underpass unless— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 197
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 193] (a)theroad is at least as wide in the tunnel or underpass asitis on each of the approaches; or (b)thedriver— (i) stops at a place on a length of road,or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies;and (ii) ispermitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Example —Stopping on a bridge where the road on thebridge is narrower than on an approach In the example,the vehicle is stopped in contravention of subsection (1).193 Stopping on a crest or curve outside abuilt-up area (1) A driver must not stop on or near acrest or curve on a length of road that is not in a built-up areaunless— (a) the driver’svehicle isvisible for100m todrivers approaching thevehicle and travelling in the direction of travelof traffic onthe same sideof the roadas the vehicle;or (b) the driver— (i)stops at a place on a length of road, or inan area, to which a parking control sign applies;and Page 198 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 194](ii) ispermitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of a road. 194Stopping near a fire hydrant etc.(1) A drivermust notstop within1m of afire hydrant,fire hydrantindicator, or fire plug indicator, unless— (a)thedriver— (i) is driving a bus; and(ii) stops at a busstop or in a bus zone; and (iii) does not leavethe bus unattended; or (b) thedriver— (i) is driving a taxi; and(ii) stops in a taxizone; and (iii) does not leavethe taxi unattended. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) For this section, a driver leaves avehicle unattended if thedriver leavesthe vehicle sothe driver isover 3mfrom theclosest point of the vehicle.(3) In this section— firehydrant meansan upright pipewith aspout, nozzleor other outlet for drawing water from amain or service pipe in case of fire or otheremergency. Current as at 7 April 2014Page199
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 195] Examples— Fire hydrant indicatorsFireplug indicator 195 Stopping at or near a bus stop(1) A driver (except the driver of a bus)must not stop at a bus stop, or on the road, within 20mbefore a sign on the road that indicatesthe bus stop,and 10m afterthe sign, unlessthe driver— (a)stops ata place ona length ofroad, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) For thissection, distancesare measured inthe direction inwhich the driver is driving.(3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Page 200Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 196]196 Stopping at or near a tram stop(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram,a tram recovery vehicle or a bus travelling along tram tracks)must not stop at a tram stop or on the road within 20m beforea sign that indicates a tram stop, unless— (a)thedriver stops at a place on a length of road, or in anarea, to which a parking control signapplies; and (b) the driveris permitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) For thissection, the distance is measured in the direction inwhich the driver is driving.(3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 197Stopping on a path, dividing strip, naturestrip or painted island (1)Adriver must not stop on a bicycle path, footpath, sharedpath or dividing strip, or a nature stripadjacent to a length of road in a built-uparea, unless the driver— (a) stopsat a placeon a lengthof road, orin an area,to which a parking control sign applies;and (b) is permitted to stop at that placeunder this regulation. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (1A) A driver mustnot stop on a painted island. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Subsection (1)does notapply tothe rider ofa bicycle oranimal. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 201
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 198] 198Obstructing access to and from a footpath,driveway etc. (1) A driver must not stop on a road in aposition that obstructs access by vehicles or pedestrians toor from a footpath ramp or a similar way of access to afootpath, or a bicycle path or passagewayunless— (a) the driver is driving a bus that isdropping off, or picking up, passengers; or (b)thedriver— (i) stops in a parking bay; and(ii) is permitted tostop in the parking bay under this regulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A driver mustnot stop on or across a driveway or other way ofaccess forvehicles travelling toor from adjacentland unless—(a) the driver— (i)isdropping off or picking up passengers; and (ii)doesnot leave the vehicle unattended; and (iii)completes thedropping offor picking upof the passengers, anddrives on,as soon aspracticable and, in anycase, within 2 minutes after stopping; or(b) the driver— (i)stops in a parking bay; and(ii) is permitted tostop in the parking bay under this regulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) For subsection(2)(a)(ii), a driver leaves a vehicle unattendedif the driveris more than3m from theclosest partof the vehicle.Page202 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 199]Example —Blocking a driveway In the example,the vehicle marked with an ‘X’ is stopped in contravention ofsubsection (2). 199 Stopping near apostbox A driver mustnot stop ona road within3m of apublic postboxunless— (a) the driver is dropping off, or pickingup, passengers or mail; or (b)thedriver— (i) stops at a place on a length of road,or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies;and (ii) ispermitted tostop atthat placeunder thisregulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 200 Stopping onroads—heavy and long vehicles (1)Thedriver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stopon alength of road that is not in a built-up area, except on theshoulder of the road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page203
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 201] (2)Subject to subsections (2A) and (2B), thedriver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on alength of road in a built-up areafor longer than1 hour, unlessthe driver ispermitted to stop on the length of road forlonger than 1 hour by information on or with a traffic controldevice. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2A) The driver of aheavy vehicle, or long vehicle, may stop on a length of roadin a built-up area for longer than 1 hour if thedriver is engaged in dropping off or pickingup goods for all of the period when the vehicle isstopped. (2B) Subsections (2)and (2A) apply unless a local law otherwise provides.(3) In this section— heavyvehicle means a vehicle with a GVM of 4.5t ormore. long vehicle means a vehiclethat, together with any load or projection, is7.5m long, or longer. road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of a road. 201Stopping on a road with bicycle parkingsign A driver (exceptthe rider ofa bicycle) mustnot stop ona length of road to which a bicycleparking sign applies, unless the driver isdropping off, or picking up, passengers. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 204 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 202]Example —Bicycle parking sign 202Stopping on a road with motorbike parkingsign A driver (except the rider of a motorbike)must not stop on a length ofroad towhich amotorbike parkingsign applies,unless the driver is dropping off, orpicking up, passengers. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. Example —Motorbike parking sign 203Stopping in a parking area for people withdisabilities (1) A drivermust notstop ina parking areafor people withdisabilities unless— (a)thedriver’s vehicle displays a current parking permit forpeople with disabilities; andCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page205
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 203] (b)the driver complieswith theconditions ofuse of thepermit. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Aparking area for people withdisabilities is a length or area of aroad— (a) to which a permissive parking signdisplaying a people with disabilities symbol applies; or(b) to which a people with disabilitiesparking sign applies; or (c)indicated by a road marking (apeople with disabilities roadmarking )that consistsof, or includes,a people withdisabilities symbol. Examples —People with disabilities symbolsPermissive parking sign displaying apeople with disabilities symbol (for alength of road) Permissiveparking sign displaying a people with disabilities symbol (foran area) Page 206Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 203A]People with disabilities parking sign203A Stopping in a slip laneAdriver must not stop in a slip lane unless— (a)a parking controlsign appliesto the placewhere thedriver stops; and (b)the driver ispermitted tostop atthe place underthis regulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Division 7 Permissiveparking signs and parking fees 204Meaning of particular information on or withpermissive parking signs (1)Thissection explains the meaning of certain information on orwitha permissive parking sign applying to a length of road oranarea. Current as at 7 April 2014Page207
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 204] Examples— Permissive parking sign (for a lengthof road) Permissiveparking sign (for an area) Permissive parking sign (for a lengthof road) (2) A wholenumber, fraction,or whole numberand fraction, immediately tothe left of the letter ‘P’ indicates that a drivermust notpark onthe length ofroad, orin the area,continuously for longer than the period ofhours, or fraction of an hour, equal to the number,fraction, or number and fraction, shown.Page208 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 204]Examples of permissive parking signs showingpermitted parking periods and times of operation— Example 1 Example 2Permissive parking sign applying to aPermissive parking sign applying toan length of road with a whole number tothe area with a whole number to the left ofP left of P In example 1, thesign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for longerthan 1 hour on Saturdays between 9a.m. andmidday. In example 2, the sign indicates that, unlesspermitted by information on or with another traffic controldevice, a person must not park in the area for longer than 2 hourson— • Mondays to Fridays between 8.30a.m.and 5p.m. • Saturdays between 8.30a.m. andmidday. (3) A number, together with the word‘minute’, immediately to the right of the letter ‘P’ indicatesthat a driver must not park on the length ofroad, or in the area, continuously for longer than the numberof minutes shown. Example— Example 3Permissive parking sign with a number ofminutes to the right of P In this example, the sign indicatesthat a driver must not park continuously for longer than5minutes between 9a.m. and 4p.m. on Mondays to Fridays.Current as at 7 April 2014Page209
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 205] (4)Theword ‘parking’, together with words indicating a numberofhours or minutes, indicates that a driver must not park onthelength of road, or in the area, continuously for longer thanthenumber of hours or minutes shown. 205Parking for longer than indicated(1) A driver must not park continuously ona length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parkingsign applies for longer than— (a)theperiod indicated by information on or with the sign;or (b) ifsection 206applies tothe driver—the periodpermitted under that section.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(1A) Ifa permissive parkingsign doesnot indicate aperiod anddoes notindicate thatit applies atparticular times,or at particular timeson particular days, a driver may, at any time, parkcontinuously on a length of road, or in an area, to whichthesign applies, unless— (a) anotherparking controlsign appliesto the lengthof road or area; and (b)the driver isprohibited fromparking onthe length ofroad, or in the area, under thisregulation. (2) For subsection (1), a driver parkscontinuously on a length of road, or in anarea, to which a permissive parking sign appliesfromthe time when the driver parks on the length of road or inthearea until the driver or another driver moves the vehicleoff the length of road or out of thearea. 205A Parking outside times indicatedIf a permissive parkingsign indicatesthat itapplies atparticular times,or at particular timeson particular days,a driver may park on the length of road,or in an area, to which Page 210 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 206]thesign applies at a time, or at a time on a day, when the signdoesnot apply, unless— (a) another parkingcontrol signapplies tothe length ofroador area; and (b) the driveris prohibited fromparking onthe length ofroad, or in the area, at that time, or atthat time on that day, under this regulation.206 Time extension for people withdisabilities (1) This section applies to a driverif— (a) the driver’s vehicle displays acurrent parking permit for people with disabilities; and(b) the drivercomplies withthe conditions ofuse of thepermit. (2)Thedriver may park continuously on a length of road, or in anarea, to which a permissive parking signapplies— (a) if the time limit on the sign is lessthan 30 minutes—for 30 minutes; or (b)ifthe time limit on the sign is 30 minutes or more—foranunlimited time. 207 Section number not usedDivision 8 Parallelparking 208 Parallel parking on a road (except ina median strip parking area) (1)A driver whoparks ona road (exceptin a medianstrip parking area)must position the driver’s vehicle in accordancewithsubsections (2) to (8). Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) The driver must position the vehicleto face— Current as at 7 April 2014Page211
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 208] (a)inthe direction of travel of vehicles in the marked laneorline of traffic on, or next to, the part of the road wherethedriver parks; or (b) if thereis no trafficon, or nextto, the partof the road—inthe direction inwhich vehiclesordinarily travel on, ornext to, the part of the road. (3)If the roadis a two-wayroad, thedriver mustposition thevehicle parallel, and as near aspracticable, to the far left side of theroad. (4) If theroad isa one-way road,the driver mustposition thevehicle parallel, and as near aspracticable, to the far left or far rightside ofthe road, unlessotherwise indicatedby information on or with a parkingcontrol sign. (5) If the driver does not park in aparking bay, the driver must position thevehicle at least 1m from the closest point of anyvehicle in front of it and any vehiclebehind it. (6) If the road has a continuous dividingline or a dividing strip, the drivermust positionthe vehicle atleast 3mfrom thecontinuous dividingline ordividing strip,unless otherwiseindicated by information on or with aparking control sign. (7) Ifthe road doesnot have acontinuous dividingline ora dividing strip, the driver mustposition the vehicle so there is at least 3m ofthe road alongside the vehicle that is clear forother vehiclesto pass, unlessotherwise indicatedby information on or with a parkingcontrol sign. (8) The driver must position the vehicleso the vehicle does not unreasonably obstructthe path ofother vehiclesor pedestrians. (9)Thissection does not apply to— (a) a driver if thedriver parks on a length of road, or in an area, to which aparking control sign or road marking applies,and information onor with thesign orroad marking includesthe words ‘angle parking’ or ‘angle’; orPage212 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 208](b) the rider of a motorbike if the riderparks the motorbike on a length of road, or in an area, to whicha permissive parking signapplies andthe sign indicatesthat thelength of road or area is for parkingmotorbikes. (10) Subsections (3)and (4) donot apply tothe rider ofa motorbike ifthe rider positionsthe motorbike soat least 1wheel is as near as practicable to the farleft or far right side of the road. (11)If aroad has 1 or more service roads, the part of the road usedbythe main body of moving vehicles, and each service road,istaken to be a separate road for this section. (12)Inthis section— continuous dividing line means—(a) a single continuous dividing lineonly; or (b) a single continuous dividing line tothe left or right of a broken dividing line; or(c) 2 parallel continuous dividinglines. road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 213
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 208A] Example—Parallel parking—minimum distance from othervehicles and dividing strip In the example, the vehicles markedwith an ‘X’ are parked in contravention of this section.208A Parallel parking in a road-relatedarea (except in a median strip parking area)(1) A driver who parks in a road-relatedarea (except in a median strip parking area) must position thedriver’s vehicle to face— (a) in the directionof travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line oftraffic next to the part of the road-related areawhere the driver parks; or(b) if there is no traffic next to thatpart of the road-related area—in the direction in whichvehicles could lawfully travel in the road-related area;or (c) if theroad-related areais an areathat dividesa road—either— (i)inthe direction of travel of vehicles in the markedlaneor line of traffic to the left of the driver; or(ii) if there is notraffic to the left of the driver—in the direction inwhich vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of theroad. Page 214 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 209]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) Subsection (1)does notapply ifsigns orroad markingsindicate that angle parking is required inthe road-related area. 209 Parallel parkingin a median strip parking area (1)Thissection applies to a driver who parks in a median stripparking area if a parking control sign orroad marking applies to thearea, andinformation onor with thesign orroad markingindicates that the driver’s vehicle must be positionedparallel to the median strip.(2) The driver must position the driver’svehicle— (a) to face— (i)inthe direction of travel of vehicles in the markedlaneor line of traffic to the left of the driver; or(ii) if there is notraffic to the left of the driver—in the direction inwhich vehicles ordinarily travel on the part of the roadto the left of the driver; and (b)parallel, and as near as practicable, to thecentre of the median strip; and (c)ifthe driver does not park in a parking bay—at least 1mfromthe closest point of any vehicle in front of it andanyvehicle behind it. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) This section does not apply to therider of a motorbike. Division 9 Angleparking 210 Angle parking (1)If adriver parks in a parking area on the side of a road, or ina median strip parking area, to which aparking control sign or road markingapplies, andinformation onthe sign includesthe words ‘angleparking’ or‘angle’, orthe road markingCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page215
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 210] indicatesa particular anglefor parking, thedriver mustposition the driver’s vehicleinaccordance with subsections (2) to(4). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the parking control sign or roadmarking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at a statedangle, other than 90°, the driver must position thevehicle— (a) at an angle as near as practicable tothe stated angle; and (b) if the vehicleis parked on the side of the road—with the rear of thevehicle nearest to the centre of the road. (2A)Ifthe parking control sign or road marking does not indicateanangle at which the vehicle must be positioned, the drivermustposition the vehicle— (a) at an angle asnear as practicable to 45°, as shown in example 1 or 2;and (b) if the vehicle is parked on the sideof the road—with the rear of the vehicle nearest to thecentre of the road. Page 216 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 210]Examples —Example 1 Example 2Parking at 45° at the side of atwo-way Parking at 45° at the side of aone-way road road (2B)Subsections (2) and (2A) do not apply if theroad marking or information onthe parking controlsign includesthe words ‘rear in’, orsimilar words. (3) If the parking control sign or roadmarking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at an angleof 90º, the driver— (a) must position the driver’s vehicle sothe vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to 90º,as shown in example 3 or 4; and (b)ifthe vehicle is parked on the side of the road— (i)if the roadmarking, orinformation onthe sign, includesthe words ‘rearin’, orsimilar words—mustposition the vehicle with the front of the vehiclenearest to the centre of the road; or Current as at 7April 2014 Page 217
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 210] (ii)if the roadmarking, orinformation onthe sign, includesthe words ‘frontin’ or similarwords—must position the vehicle with therear of the vehicle nearest to the centre of theroad; or (iii) otherwise—may positionthe vehicle witheither the front orrear of the vehicle nearest to the centre of theroad. Examples —Example 3 Parking at 90º atthe side of a two-way road Example 4Parking at 90º at the right side of aone-way road (4)If the roadmarking, orinformation onthe parking controlsign, includes the words ‘rear in’, orsimilar words, the driver must position the vehicle—(a) at an angle as near as practicableto— (i) if theroad markingor sign indicatesthat thevehicle must be positioned at a statedangle—the stated angle; or (ii)if the roadmarking orsign doesnot indicate anangle atwhich thevehicle mustbe positioned—45°; andPage218 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 210](b) if the vehicle is parked on the sideof the road—with the front of the vehicle nearest to thecentre of the road. Examples —Example 5 Example 6Parking rear in at 30° at the side of aroad Parking rear in at 30° in a medianstrip parking area Current as at 7April 2014 Page 219
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 210] Example 7Example 8 Parking rear inat 45° at the side of a road Parking rear inat 45° in a median strip parking area Page 220Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 211]Example 9 Example10 Parking rear in at 60° at the side of aroad Parking rear in at 60° in a medianstrip parking area (4A)Subsection (4)does notapply ifthe parking signor road markingindicates thatthe vehicle mustbe positioned atan angle of 90°. (5)Thissection does not apply to the rider of a motorbike.Division 10 Other parkingrelated rules 211 Parking in parking bays(1) This section applies to a driver whoparks on a length of road, or in an area, that has parking bays(whether or not a park in bays only sign applies to the lengthof road or area). Current as at 7 April 2014Page221
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 212] Example— Park in bays only sign(2) The drivermust positionthe driver’s vehiclecompletely within a singleparking bay, unless the vehicle is too wide or long to fitcompletely within the bay. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (3) If the vehicle is too wide or long tofit completely within a single parking bay, the driver mustpark the driver’s vehicle within the minimum number of parkingbays needed to park the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 212 Entering andleaving a median strip parking area (1)Ifinformation on or with a traffic control device indicatesthat a driver must enter or leave a median stripparking area in a particular direction, the driver must enteror leave the area in that direction. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) If there is noinformation on or with a traffic control device that indicatesthat a driver must enter or leave a median stripparking area in a particular direction, thedriver must enter or leave the area by drivingforward. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page222 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 12Restrictions on stopping and parking [s 213]Example —Leaving median strip parking area by drivingforward 213 Making a motor vehicle secure(1) This section applies to the driver ofa motor vehicle who stops and leaves the vehicle on a road,unless the driver need not comply withthe section underanother provisionof this regulation. (2)Before leaving the vehicle, the drivermust— (a) apply the vehicle’s parking brakeeffectively; or (b) if weatherconditions, forexample, snow,prevent theeffective operationof the parkingbrake—effectively restrain thevehicle’s movement in another way. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) Also, beforeleaving the vehicle the driver must switch off theengine if the driver will be more than 3mfrom the closest part of the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page223
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 12 Restrictions on stopping andparking [s 213A] (4)Inaddition, before leaving the vehicle the driver must removetheignition key if there is no-one 16 years or older remaininginthe vehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5) If thedriver willbe over 3mfrom theclosest partof the vehicleand there isno-one leftin the vehicle,the driver must—(a) if thewindows ofthe vehicle canbe secured—secure thewindows immediately beforeleaving thevehicle; and(b) if the doors of the vehicle can belocked—lock the doors immediately after leaving thevehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(6) For subsection (5), a window is secureeven if it is open by up to 50mm. (7)Subsections (3) to (5) do not applyto— (a) the driverof a wastemanagement vehiclewhile emptying orcollecting wheelie bins; or (b)thedriver of an armoured vehicle while on duty. 213AEvidentiary provision For this part,evidence that a vehicle was found stationary at aplace is evidence that the vehicle wasparked or stopped at the place. Page 224Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lightsand warning devices [s 214] Part 13Lights and warning devicesDivision 1 Lights onvehicles (except bicycles, animals and animal-drawnvehicles) 214 Division does not apply to riders ofbicycles, animals or animal-drawn vehicles This divisiondoes not apply to the rider of a bicycle, animaloranimal-drawn vehicle. 215 Using lights whendriving at night or in hazardous weatherconditions (1) A drivermust notdrive atnight, orin hazardous weatherconditions causing reduced visibilityunless— (a) the headlights, tail-lights and numberplate light fitted to the driver’svehicle areoperating effectively andare clearly visible; and(b) if thevehicle isfitted withclearance lightsor side markerlights—those lights are operating effectively andareclearly visible. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) However, this section does not applyto a driver if— (a) the driver’s vehicle is stopped orparked at a place on a length of road, or in an area, towhich a parking control sign applies; and (b)thedriver is permitted to stop or park at that place underthisregulation. (3) Also, adriver drivingduring theday in fog,or other hazardousweather conditions causing reduced visibility, maydrive without the headlights of the driver’svehicle operating if the vehicle is fitted with front foglights and those lights are operatingeffectively and are clearly visible. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 225
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lights and warningdevices [s 216] (4)In subsection (1),a reference toa kind oflight fittedto a vehicleis a referenceto a lightof that kindrequired tobe fitted under— (a)the heavy vehiclestandards underthe Heavy VehicleNational Law (Queensland); or(b) the Standards and SafetyRegulation. 216 Towing a vehicle at night or inhazardous weather conditions (1)A driver mustnot tow avehicle atnight, orin hazardous weatherconditions causing reduced visibility, unless— (a)ifthe towed vehicle is being towed from the front of thevehicle— (i)the tail-lights ofthe vehicle areoperating effectively andare clearly visible; or (ii) thevehicle hasportable rearlights thatare operating; or (b)ifthe towed vehicle is being towed from the rear of thevehicle—the vehiclehas portable rearlights thatare operating. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) However, thissection does not apply to the driver of a tow truck if—(a) the driver is towing a disabledvehicle carrying a placard load of dangerous goods to a placethat is safely off the road; and (b)avehicle carrying a warning to other traffic is followingimmediately behind the disabledvehicle. (3) In this section— dangerousgoods hasthe meaning givenby the TransportOperations (RoadUse Management—DangerousGoods) Regulation2008 . Page 226 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lightsand warning devices [s 217] placardload hasthe meaning givenby the TransportOperations (RoadUse Management—DangerousGoods) Regulation2008 . portable rear lightsmeans— (a)for a vehiclebeing towedfrom thefront ofthe vehicle—a pairof lights attachedto the rearof the vehiclethat, whenoperating, showa red lightthat isclearly visiblefor at least200m fromthe rear ofthe vehicle; or (b)fora vehicle being towed from the rear of the vehicle—apair oflights attachedto the frontof the vehiclethat, when operating,show a red light that is clearly visible for at least200m from the front of the vehicle. roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 217Usingfog lights (1) The driver of a vehicle fitted with afront fog light or rear fog light must notoperate the fog light unless the driver is drivinginfog or other hazardous weather conditions causing reducedvisibility. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— front fog light means a light(other than a headlight) fitted to the front of avehicle to improve illumination of the road in fog, snowfall,heavy rain or dust clouds. rear foglight meansa light (otherthan abrake light,a tail-light, a number plate light or areversing light) fitted to the rear of avehicle to make the vehicle more easily visible fromtherear in fog, snowfall, heavy rain or dust clouds.Current as at 7 April 2014Page227
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lights and warningdevices [s 218] 218Usingheadlights on high-beam (1) The driver of avehicle must not use the vehicle’s headlights on high-beam, orallow the vehicle’s headlights to be used on high-beam, ifthe driver is driving— (a) less than 200mbehind a vehicle travelling in the same direction as thedriver; or (b) less than 200m from an oncomingvehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) However, if the driver is overtaking avehicle, the driver may briefly switchthe headlights fromlow-beam tohigh-beam immediatelybefore the driver begins to overtake the vehicle.Examples— Example 1Usingheadlights on low-beam when travelling less than 200m behindanother vehicle travelling in the same directionExample 2 Using headlightson low-beam when travelling within 200m of an oncomingvehicle 219 Lights not to be used to dazzle otherroad users A driver must not use, or allow to be used,any light fitted to or in the driver’s vehicle to dazzle, or ina way that is likely to dazzle, another road user.Page228 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lightsand warning devices [s 220] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 220 Using lights onvehicles that are stopped (1) A driver mustnot stop on a road at night unless— (a)if the driver’svehicle is2.2m wide,or wider—the clearance andside marker lights fitted to the vehicle are operatingeffectively and are clearly visible; or (b)in any othercase—the parkinglights fittedto the driver’s vehicleare operating effectively and are clearly visible.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) This section does not apply to adriver if the driver stops on a lengthof road, orin an area,with streetlighting andthe driver’s vehicle is visible for atleast 200m in all directions from thevehicle. (3) In subsection (1),a reference toa kind oflight fittedto a vehicleis a referenceto a lightof that kindrequired tobe fitted under— (a)the heavy vehiclestandards underthe Heavy VehicleNational Law (Queensland); or(b) the Standards and SafetyRegulation. (4) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 221Usinghazard warning lights The driver of a vehicle fitted withhazard warning lights must not use the hazard warning lights, orallow them to be used, unless— (a)thevehicle is stopped and is obstructing, or is likely toobstruct, the path of other vehicles orpedestrians; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page229
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lights and warningdevices [s 222] (b)thevehicle is a slow-moving vehicle and is obstructing,or is likelyto obstruct, thepath ofother vehiclesor pedestrians; or (c)thevehicle is stopped in an emergency stopping lane; or(d) the driverstops thevehicle tosell aproduct (forexample, ice creams) that may attractchildren onto the road; or (e)the driver isdriving inhazardous weatherconditions (for example,fog or smoke); or (f) the hazardwarning lightsare operating aspart ofan anti-theft device, or an alcoholignition interlock, fitted to the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 222 School bus not tobe driven without warning lights and warningsigns (1) A person must not drive a school busunless it is fitted with warning signsand warning lightsunder thepassenger transportstandard, schedule 1, section 19. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Subsection (1)does not apply to a school bus that is a heavy vehicle.222A Use of warning lights—picking up orsetting down school children (1)Thissection applies to the driver of a vehicle, whether or not aschool bus, fitted with warning lights andwarning signs under the passenger transportstandard, schedule1, section 19or 25(1) orthe Heavy Vehicle(Vehicle Standards) NationalRegulation , schedule 2,section 76. (2) The driver must— (a)if the driverintends tostop topick upor set downchildren—signal thatintention bysimultaneously Page 230Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lightsand warning devices [s 223] activating thewarning lights, at least 5 seconds before thebus stops, unlessthe warning lightsare already operatingunder thepassenger transportstandard, schedule 1,section 24(3) or the Heavy Vehicle (VehicleStandards) NationalRegulation ,schedule 2,section 77(3);and (b) keep the warning lights activateduntil at least 5 seconds after the vehicle has started to moveoff after stopping. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The driver must ensure the warninglights are not activated, other thanunder subsection (2),the passenger transportstandard, schedule1, section 24(3)or the HeavyVehicle (VehicleStandards) National Regulation , schedule 2,section 77(3), while the vehicle is on a road,unless the driver has a reasonable excuse. Example— The driver is testing the lights toensure their satisfactory operation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) Thissection appliesdespite therequirement underthe passenger transport standard, schedule1, section 24(3) or the Heavy Vehicle(Vehicle Standards) NationalRegulation ,schedule 2,section 77(3)that thevehicle befitted withautomatically operating warninglights. Division 2 Lights onanimal-drawn vehicles 223 Using lights whenriding an animal-drawn vehicle at night or in hazardousweather conditions A person must not ride an animal-drawnvehicle at night, or in hazardous weatherconditions causingreduced visibility, unless thevehicle is fitted with, and displays— (a)awhite light fitted at or towards the front of each side ofthevehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200m fromthefront of the vehicle; and Current as at 7 April 2014Page231
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lights and warningdevices [s 224] (b)ared light fitted at or towards the rear of each side of thevehicle that is clearly visible for at least200m from the rear of the vehicle; and (c)ared reflector fitted at or towards the rear of each side ofthevehicle that is— (i) not over 1.5m above ground level;and (ii) clearly visiblefor at least 50m from the rear of the vehicle whenlight is projected onto it by another vehicle’sheadlight on low-beam. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. Division 3 Horns and radardetectors 224 Using horns and similar warningdevices A driver must not use, or allow to be used,a horn, or similar warning device, fitted to or in the driver’svehicle unless— (a) it isnecessary touse the horn,or warning device,to warn otherroad usersor animals ofthe approach orposition of the vehicle; or(b) the horn, or warning device, is beingused as part of an anti-theft device, or an alcohol ignitioninterlock, fitted to the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 225 Using radardetectors and similar devices (1)Aperson must not drive a vehicle if the vehicle, or a trailerbeing towed by the vehicle, has in or onit— (a) a devicefor preventing theeffective useof a speedmeasuring device; or (b)a device fordetecting theuse of aspeed measuringdevice. Maximumpenalty—40 penalty units. Page 232 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lightsand warning devices [s 226] (2)Aperson who is travelling in or on a vehicle or trailer mustnothave in the person’s possession a device for preventing theeffective useof a speedmeasuring device,or a devicefor detecting the use of a speed measuringdevice. Maximum penalty—40 penalty units.(3) Subsections (1)and (2) applywhether ornot the deviceis operating or in working order.Division 4 Portable warningtriangles for heavy vehicles 226Heavyvehicles to be equipped with portable warning trianglesAperson must not drive a vehicle with a GVM over 12t unlessthe vehicle isequipped withat least 3portable warningtriangles. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 227 Using portablewarning triangles (1) This sectionapplies toa driver ifthe GVM ofthe driver’s vehicle is over12t. (2) If the driver stops on a road, or ifsome or all of any load being carried by thevehicle falls onto a road, at a place where the speed limit is80km/h or more and the vehicle is not visible atanytime for at least 300m in all directions from that place,the driver must use at least 3 portable warningtriangles, placed in accordance with subsection (4), towarn other road users of the vehicle or load.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) If the driver stops on a road, or ifsome or all of any load being carried by thevehicle falls onto a road, at a place where the speed limit isless than 80km/h and the vehicle is not visible atanytime for at least 200m in all directions from that place,the driver must use at least 3 portable warningtriangles, placed in Current as at 7 April 2014Page233
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 13 Lights and warningdevices [s 227] accordance withsubsection (5), to warn other road users of the vehicle orload. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) For subsection (2), the drivermust— (a) place 1triangle atleast 200m,but not over250m, behind thevehicle or fallen load; and (b)if the vehicleor fallen loadis on aone-way roador divided road,place 1triangle betweenthe triangle mentionedin paragraph (a)and the vehicleor fallen load; and(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is noton a one-way road or divided road, place 1 triangle atleast 200m, but not over 250m, in front of the vehicle orfallen load; and (d) place 1 triangle at the side of thevehicle, or fallen load, in a position that gives sufficientwarning to other road users of the position of the vehicleor fallen load. (5) For subsection (3), the drivermust— (a) place 1 triangle at least 50m, but notover 150m, behind the vehicle or fallen load; and(b) if thevehicle orfallen loadis on aone-way roador divided road,place 1triangle betweenthe triangle mentionedin paragraph (a)and the vehicleor fallen load; and(c) if thevehicle orfallen loadis not ona one-way ordivided road, place 1 triangle at least 50m,but not over 150m, in front of the vehicle or fallenload; and (d) place 1 triangle at the side of thevehicle, or fallen load, in a position that gives sufficientwarning to other road users of the position of the vehicleor fallen load. (6) In this section— dividedroad means any length of a two-way road that hasa median strip. Page 234Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 227A] roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of a road. Division 5Signs for oversize vehicles227A Do not overtake turning vehicle signsfor long vehicles A person must not drive a vehicle displayinga do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle,together with any load or projection, is not 7.5m long, orlonger. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.227B Warning sign not to be displayed ifnot required by law A person mustnot drive avehicle displaying anoversize warning signunless— (a) the person is required under the Actor another Act to display the sign; or (b)thevehicle is temporarily in Queensland on a journeyfromanother State and the sign must be displayed on thevehicle under the law of the otherState. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Part14 Rules for pedestrians Division 1General 228Nopedestrian signs A pedestrian must not travel past a nopedestrians sign. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page235
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s229] Example —Nopedestrians sign 229 Pedestrians on a road with a roadaccess sign A pedestrian must not be on a length of roadto which a road access sign applies if information on orwith the sign indicates that pedestrians are not permittedbeyond the sign. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Roadaccess sign 230 Crossing a road—general(1) A pedestrian crossing a road—(a) must cross by the shortest safe route;and (b) must not stay on the road longer thannecessary to cross the road safely. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 236 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 231] (2)However, ifthe pedestrian iscrossing theroad atan intersection withtraffic lightsand a pedestrians maycross diagonally sign,the pedestrian may cross the road diagonally at theintersection. (3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Example— Pedestrians may cross diagonallysign 231 Crossing a road at pedestrianlights (1) A pedestrian approaching orat an intersection, oranother place on a road,with pedestrian lights and traffic lights must comply with thissection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If thepedestrian lightsshow ared pedestrian lightand the pedestrian hasnot already started crossing the intersection orroad, the pedestrian must not start to crossuntil the pedestrian lights change to green.(3) If, whilethe pedestrian iscrossing theroad, thepedestrian lights change toflashing red or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the roadfor longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (inthe direction of travel of the pedestrian) of thefollowing— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 237
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s232] (a) a dividing strip,safety zone, or traffic island,forming part of the areaset aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at theintersection or place (the safety area );(b) the nearest side of the road.(4) If, under subsection (3), thepedestrian crosses to the safety area, thepedestrian must remain in the safety area until thepedestrian lights change to green.(5) However, ifthe pedestrian cannot operate thepedestrian lights from thesafety area, the pedestrian may cross to the farsideof the road when— (a) the traffic lights change to green orflashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing;and (b) it is safe to do so.(6) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Examples— Red pedestrian light showing redpedestrian symbol Green pedestrianlight showing green pedestrian symbol 232Crossing a road at traffic lights(1) A pedestrian approaching orat an intersection, oranother placeon a road,with trafficlights, butwithout pedestrian lights mustcomply with this section. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. Page 238 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 233] (2)Ifthe traffic lights show a red or yellow traffic light andthe pedestrian has not already started crossingthe intersection or road, the pedestrian must not start to crossuntil— (a) the traffic lights change to green orflashing yellow; or (b) there is no red traffic lightshowing. (3) If, while the pedestrian is crossingthe road, the traffic lights change to yellowor red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road for longerthan necessary to cross safely to the nearer (inthedirection of travel of the pedestrian) of the following—(a) a dividing strip,safety zone, or traffic island,forming part of the areaset aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at theintersection or place (a safety area );(b) the far side of the road.(3A) Despitesubsection (3), the pedestrian may instead return totheside of the road, or a safety area, that the pedestrian hasjustleft, but only if— (a) at the time the lights change, thatside or safety area is closer to the pedestrian than the sideor safety area the pedestrian was approaching at the time;and (b) the pedestrian does not stay on theroad for longer than is necessary to return to that side orsafety area. (4) If, undersubsection (3)or (3A), thepedestrian crosses,or returns, toa safety area,the pedestrian mustremain inthe safety area until— (a)thetraffic lights change to green or flashing yellow; or(b) there is no red traffic lightshowing. (5) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 233Crossing a road to or from a tram(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road toget on a tram at a tram stop until the tram has stopped at thetram stop. Current as at 7 April 2014Page239
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s234] Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A pedestrian crossing a road aftergetting off a tram— (a) must cross to the nearest footpath bythe shortest safe route or, if there is no footpath,cross theroad bythe shortest safe route; and(b) must not stay on the road for longerthan necessary to cross the road safely. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) This sectiondoes not apply to a pedestrian— (a)on asafety zone; or (b) crossing a road to or from a safetyzone. (4) Subsection (2) does not applyto— (a) a pedestrian in a shared zone;or (b) an employeeof a publictransport operatorwho is inuniform andengaged incarrying outthe employee’s duties.(5) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. tramincludes a bus travelling along tramtracks. 234 Crossing a road on or near a crossingfor pedestrians (1) A pedestrian must not cross a road, orpart of a road, within 20m ofa crossing onthe road, exceptat the crossingor another crossing, unless thepedestrian is— (a) crossing, or helping anotherpedestrian to cross, an area of the roadbetween tram tracks and the far left side of the road to geton, or after getting off, a tram or bus; or (b)crossing to or from a safety zone; or(c) crossing atan intersection withtraffic lightsand a pedestrians maycross diagonally sign; or Page 240 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 235] (d)crossing in a shared zone; or(e) crossing a road, or a part of a road,from which vehicles are excluded, either permanently ortemporarily. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A pedestrian must not stay on acrossing on a road for longer than necessaryto cross the road safely. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (3) Subsection (2) does not apply to aperson who is a crossing supervisor under the Act.(4) In this section— crossingmeans a children’s crossing, marked footcrossing or pedestrian crossing. Example— Pedestrians may cross diagonallysign 235 Crossing a level crossing(1) A pedestrian must not cross a railwayline, or tram tracks, at a level crossing unless—(a) there isa pedestrian facilityat the crossingand the pedestrian usesthe facility; or (b) there is no pedestrian facility at, orwithin 20m of, the crossing. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page241
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s235] (2) A pedestrian must not cross a railwayline, or tram tracks, at a level crossing if— (a)warning lights (for example, twin red lightsor rotating red lights) are flashing or warning bellsare ringing; or (b) a gate,boom orbarrier atthe crossing isclosed oris opening or closing; or(c) a train or tram is on or entering thecrossing; or (d) a trainor tram approaching thecrossing canbe seen from thecrossing or is sounding a warning, and there would be adanger of the pedestrian being struck by the train or tram ifthe pedestrian entered the crossing; or (e)thecrossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.Example for subsection (2)(e)— The crossing,or a roadbeyond thecrossing, maybe blocked bycongested traffic, a disabled vehicle, acollision between vehicles or between a vehicleand a pedestrian, or by stock on the road. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2A) Ifany of thefollowing eventsoccurs aftera pedestrian hasstarted tocross arailway line,or tram tracks,at a levelcrossing, the pedestrian must finishcrossing the line or tracks withoutdelay— (a) warning lightsstart flashing,or warning bellsstart ringing;(b) a gate, boom or barrier starts toclose; (c) a train or tram approaches thecrossing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— pedestrianfacility means a footpath, bridge or otherstructure designed for the use of pedestrians.Page242 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 235A] 235ACrossing a pedestrian level crossing thathas a red pedestrian light (1)A pedestrian levelcrossing isan area wherea footpath orshared path crosses a railway or tram tracksat substantially the same level. (2)If apedestrian approaches a pedestrian level crossing that hasared pedestrian light, the pedestrian must not start to crossthe crossing while the light is red.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) If a red pedestrian light at apedestrian level crossing appears aftera pedestrian hasstarted tocross thecrossing, thepedestrian must finish crossing the crossingwithout delay. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Redpedestrian light showing red pedestrian symbol 236Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard orobstruction (1) A pedestrian must not cause a traffichazard by moving into the path of a driver.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A pedestrian must not unreasonablyobstruct the path of any driver or another pedestrian.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page243
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s237] (3) For subsection (2),a pedestrian doesnot unreasonably obstruct thepath of another pedestrian only by travelling moreslowly than other pedestrians.(4) A pedestrian must not stand on, ormove onto, a road— (a) to solicit contributions, employmentor business from an occupant of a vehicle; or(b) to hitchhike; or (c)todisplay an advertisement; or (d)tosell things or offer things for sale; or (e)towash or clean, or offer to wash or clean, a vehicle’swindscreen. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5) A driver, or apassenger, in or on a vehicle must not buy, or offer to buy, anarticle or service from a person standing on the road.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(6) Subsections (4)(a),(c) and (d)and (5) donot apply toa pedestrian who is engaged in roadsidevending under a permit or other authority given to the personunder a local law. (7) In this section— roadincludes a shoulder of a road, a medianstrip, a painted island ora traffic island,but does notinclude anotherroad-related area. 237Getting on or into a moving vehicle(1) A person must not get on, or into, amoving vehicle unless— (a) the personis— (i) engaged in the door-to-door deliveryor collection of goods, or in the collection of waste orgarbage; and (ii) required to getin or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, atfrequent intervals; and Page 244 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 238] (b)thevehicle is not travelling at a speed over 5km/h.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) This section does not apply to aperson who is getting on or off a bicycle oranimal. 238 Pedestrians travelling along a road(except if using a wheeled recreational device, wheeled toy orpersonal mobility device) (1)Apedestrian must not travel along a road if there is afootpath or nature strip adjacent to the road, unlessit is impracticable to travel on the footpath or naturestrip. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A pedestrian travelling along aroad— (a) must keep as far to the left or rightside of the road as is practicable; and (ab)must, whenmoving forward,face approaching trafficthat ismoving inthe direction oppositeto which thepedestrian is travelling, unless it isimpracticable to do so; and (b)mustnot travel on the road alongside more than 1 otherpedestrian or vehicle travelling on the roadin the same direction asthe pedestrian, unlessthe pedestrian isovertaking other pedestrians.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— pedestrian does not includea person— (a) travelling inor on awheeled recreational deviceor wheeled toy; or (b)using a personal mobility device.Note — See section 244Gabout using a personal mobility device for travellingalonga road. Current as at 7 April 2014Page245
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s239] road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 239Pedestrians on a bicycle path or separatedfootpath (1) A pedestrian mustnot be ona bicycle path,or a partof a separatedfootpath designated for the use of bicycles, unlessthepedestrian— (a) is crossing the bicycle path orseparated footpath by the shortest safe route; and(b) does not stay on the bicycle path orseparated footpath for longer thannecessary tocross thebicycle pathor separated footpath safely.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) However, a pedestrian may be on abicycle path, or a part of a separatedfootpath designated for the use of bicycles, if—(a) the pedestrian is— (i)inor pushing a wheelchair; or (ii)on rollerblades, rollerskates ora similar wheeledrecreational device; or (iii)using a personal mobility device; and(b) there is no traffic control device, orinformation on or with a traffic control device, applying tothe bicycle path or separated footpathindicating thatthe pedestrian isnotpermitted to be on the bicycle path or the part of theseparated footpath designated for the use ofbicycles. (3) A pedestrian whois crossing abicycle path,or a partof a separatedfootpath designated forthe use ofbicycles, mustkeepout of the path of any bicycle, or any pedestrian who ispermitted under subsection (2) to be on thebicycle path, or the part ofthe separated footpathdesignated forthe use ofbicycles. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) In thisregulation— Page 246 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 239] bicyclepath meansa length ofpath beginningat a bicyclepath signor bicycle pathroad marking,and ending atthe nearest of the following—(a) an endbicycle pathsign orend bicycle pathroad marking;(b) a separatedfootpath signor separated footpathroad marking;(c) a road (except a road-relatedarea); (d) the end of the path.bicycle path road markingmeans a road marking on a path,consisting of a bicycle symbol, the words‘bicycles only’, or both the bicycle symbol and the word‘only’. end bicycle pathroad markingmeans abicycle pathroad marking with theword ‘end’. end separated footpathroad markingmeans aseparated footpath roadmarking with the word ‘end’. separatedfootpath means a length of footpath beginning ata separated footpathsign orseparated footpathroad marking,andending at the nearest of the following— (a)anend separated footpath sign or end separated footpathroadmarking; (b) a bicycle path sign or bicycle pathroad marking; (c) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles roadmarking; (d) a road (except a road-relatedarea); (e) the end of the footpath.separated footpath road markingmeans a road marking on afootpath consisting ofa pedestrian symboland a bicyclesymbol side by side, with or without theword ‘only’. Current as at 7 April 2014Page247
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s239] Examples —Bicycle path sign End bicycle pathsign Separated footpath sign End separatedfootpath sign No bicycles sign Page 248Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 240] Division 2Rules for persons travelling in or onwheeled recreational devices andwheeled toys 240Wheeled recreational devices and toys not tobe used on certain roads (1)A person mustnot travel inor on awheeled recreational device orwheeled toy on— (a) a road with a dividing line or medianstrip; or (b) a road on which the speed limit ismore than 50km/h; or (c) a one-way roadwith more than 1 marked lane; or (d)aroad at night. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to aperson who is crossing a road in or on a wheeled recreationaldevice or wheeled toy, if the person— (a)crosses the road by the shortest safe route;and (b) does not stay on the road longer thannecessary to cross the road safely. (3)Inthis section— road doesnot include aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 240ANowheeled recreational devices or toys sign Aperson ona road whois travelling inor on awheeled recreationaldevice or wheeled toy must not travel past a no wheeledrecreational devices or toys sign. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page249
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s241] Examples —Nowheeled recreational devices or toys signs 241Travelling in or on a wheeled recreationaldevice or toy on a road (1)Aperson travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device orwheeled toy on a road— (a)must keepas far tothe left sideof the roadas is practicable;and (b) must not travel alongside more than 1other pedestrian or vehicle travelling on the road in thesame direction as the person, unlessthe person isovertaking otherpedestrians. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— road does not includea road-related area, but, in subsection (1)(b), includesany shoulder of the road. 242 Travelling in oron a wheeled recreational device or toy on a footpath orshared path (1) Subject tosubsection (1A),a person travelling inor on awheeled recreational device or wheeled toyon a footpath or shared path must— (a)keepto the left of the footpath or shared path unless it isimpracticable to do so; andPage250 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 242] (b)giveway to any pedestrian (except a person travelling inoron a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy, orusing a personal mobility device) who is onthe footpath or shared path. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (1A) Subsection (1)does not apply to a person travelling in or on awheeled recreational device or wheeled toyon a footpath if a local law prohibits the travelling.(2) A sharedpath isan area opento the public(except aseparated footpath) that is designated for,or has as 1 of its main uses, use by both the riders ofbicycles and pedestrians, and includesa length ofpath foruse by bothbicycles andpedestrians beginningat a sharedpath sign,or shared pathroadmarking, and ending at the nearest of the following—(a) an endshared pathsign orend shared pathroad marking;(b) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles roadmarking; (c) a bicycle path sign or bicycle pathroad marking; (d) a road (except a road-relatedarea); (e) the end of the path.(3) In this section— endshared pathroad markingmeans ashared pathroad marking thatincludes the word ‘end’. shared path road markingmeans a road marking consistingof apedestrian symbol above a bicycle symbol. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 251
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s243] Examples —Shared path sign End shared pathsign No bicycles sign Bicycle pathsign 243 Travelling on rollerblades etc. on abicycle path or separated footpath (1)Aperson travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or asimilar wheeled recreational device,must notbe on apart ofa separated footpath designated for theuse of pedestrians unless the person— (a)is crossing theseparated footpathby the shortestsafe route;and (b) does not stay on the separatedfootpath for longer than necessary to cross the separatedfootpath safely. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A person travelling on rollerblades,rollerskates, or a similar wheeled recreational device, on abicycle path, or a part of a Page 252Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 244] separatedfootpath designated forthe use ofbicycles, mustkeepout of the path of any bicycle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 244 Wheeledrecreational devices or wheeled toys being towed etc.(1) A personmust nottravel inor on awheeled recreational device orwheeled toy that is being towed by a vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A persontravelling in or on a wheeled recreational device orwheeled toy must not hold onto a vehiclewhile the vehicle is moving. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) A persontravelling in or on a wheeled recreational device orwheeled toy must not travel within 2m of therear of a moving motor vehicle continuously for more than200m. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.244A Section number not used244B Wearing of helmets by users ofmotorised scooters (1) A person who is travelling on amotorised scooter on a road or road-related areamust wearan approved bicyclehelmet securely fittedand fastened on the person’s head. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Aperson isexempt fromwearing abicycle helmetunder subsection (1)if the personis carrying acurrent doctor’scertificate stating that, for a statedperiod— (a) the personcan not weara bicycle helmetfor medical reasons;or Current as at 7 April 2014Page253
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s244C] (b) because ofa physical characteristic ofthe person, itwould be unreasonable to require the personto wear a bicycle helmet. (3)Aperson is also exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet undersubsection (1) if— (a)theperson is a member of a religious group; and (b)theperson is wearing a type of headdress customarilywornby members of the group; and (c)thewearing of the headdress makes it impractical for theperson to wear a bicycle helmet.Division 3 Additional rulesfor using personal mobility devices 244CApplication of pt 14, div 3This divisionapplies toa person usinga personal mobilitydevice (a PMD user). 244D Age restrictionsfor PMD user A person using a personal mobility devicemust be— (a) at least 16 years; or(b) supervised byan adult whileusing thedevice ifthe person is at least 12 years but under16 years. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.244E Speed limit for deviceAperson must not use a personal mobility device at a speedover12km/h. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page254 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 244F] 244FPMDuser to wear helmet (1) A PMD user must wear an approvedbicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the user’shead. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A personis exempt fromwearing abicycle helmetunder subsection (1)if the personis carrying acurrent doctor’scertificate stating that, for a statedperiod— (a) the personcan not weara bicycle helmetfor medical reasons;or (b) because ofa physical characteristic ofthe person, itwould be unreasonable to require the personto wear a bicycle helmet. (3)Aperson is also exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet undersubsection (1) if— (a)theperson is a member of a religious group; and (b)theperson is wearing a type of headdress customarilywornby members of the group; and (c)thewearing of the headdress makes it impractical for theperson to wear a bicycle helmet.244G PMD user travelling along aroad A PMD user must not travel along a roadunless— (a) there isan obstruction ona footpath, naturestrip, bicyclepath orshared pathadjacent tothe road (anadjacent area ); and(b) it is impracticable to travel on theadjacent area; and (c) the PMD user travels less than 50malong the road to avoid the obstruction. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page255
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules for pedestrians[s244H] 244H No personal mobility devicessign A PMD usermust nottravel pasta no personalmobility devicessign. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Nopersonal mobility devices sign 244IUsinga device on a footpath or shared path (1)Subject to subsection (2), a PMD usertravelling on a footpath or shared path must—(a) keep to the left of the footpath orshared path unless it is impracticable to do so; and(b) give wayto another pedestrian (exceptanother PMDuser) who is on the footpath or sharedpath. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to a PMDuser travelling on a footpath orshared pathif a locallaw prohibits usinga personal mobility device on thefootpath or shared path. 244J Carrying peopleon device A PMD user must not carry any other personon the personal mobility device. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 256 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 14 Rules forpedestrians [s 244K] 244KTravelling to the left of oncoming PMD usersor riders on a path A PMD user on abicycle path, footpath, separated footpath or sharedpath mustkeep tothe left ofany oncoming bicyclerider or other PMD user on the path.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.244L Warning equipment on deviceAperson must not use a personal mobility device unless thedevice has a bell, horn or similar warningdevice in working order. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 244M Using device atnight A person must not use a personal mobilitydevice at night, or in hazardous weatherconditions causingreduced visibility, unless theperson, or the device, displays— (a)aflashing or steady white light that is clearly visible foratleast 200m from the front of the device; and (b)aflashing or steady red light that is clearly visible for atleast 200m from the rear of the device;and (c) a redreflector thatis clearly visiblefor at least50m from the rear of the device when lightis projected onto it by a vehicle’s headlight onlow-beam. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.244N Bicycle crossing lights provisionsalso apply to PMD user Sections 260 to 262 also apply to aPMD user as if the user were the rider of a bicycle.Current as at 7 April 2014Page257
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 15 Additional rules for bicycleriders [s 244O] 244OUsingmobile phones on device (1) Aperson mustnot use amobile phonethat theperson isholding inthe person’s handswhile theperson isusing apersonal mobility device.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— use, in relationto a mobilephone, includesany of thefollowing— (a)holding thephone to,or near, theear, whetheror not engaged in aphone call; (b) writing, sending or reading a textmessage on the phone; (c) turning thephone on or off; (d) operating any other function of thephone. 244P Drinking liquor while usingdevice A person mustnot drink liquorwhile usinga personal mobilitydevice. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Part15 Additional rules for bicycleriders 245Riding a bicycle The rider of abicycle must— (a) sit astride the rider’s seat facingforwards (except if the bicycle is not built to be riddenastride); and (b) ride with at least 1 hand on thehandlebars; and (c) if thebicycle isequipped witha seat—not ridethe bicycle seated in any other positionon the bicycle. Page 258 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 15Additional rules for bicycle riders [s 246]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.246 Carrying people on a bicycle(1) The riderof a bicyclemust notcarry morepersons onthe bicycle than the bicycle is designedto carry. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Asingle-seat bicycle with a child’s seat attached is designed tocarry 2 people, 1 on the bicycle seat and 1 on theattached child’s seat. (2) A passenger on abicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not parked, mustsit in the seat designed for the passenger. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The rider of abicycle must not ride with a passenger unless the passengercomplies with subsection (2). Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 247 Riding in abicycle lane on a road (1) The rider of abicycle riding on a length of road with a bicyclelanedesigned for bicycles travelling in the same direction astherider must ride in the bicycle lane unless it isimpracticable to do so. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— road does not includea road-related area. 247A Entering a bicycle storage areaArider of a bicycle approaching a bicycle storage area at anintersection that has traffic lights ortraffic arrows showing a red traffic light or red traffic arrowmust not enter the bicycle storage area other than from a bicyclelane, unless the rider is not required to ride in the bicyclelane under this regulation. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Current as at 7 April 2014Page259
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 15 Additional rules for bicycleriders [s 247B] 247BGiving way while entering or in a bicyclestorage area (1) A rider of a bicycle must whenentering a bicycle storage area, give wayto— (a) any vehicle that is in the area;and (b) if the area is before any green oryellow traffic lights, any motor vehicle that is entering orabout to enter the area, unless the motor vehicle is turning ina direction that is subject to a red traffic arrow;and (c) if the area forms part of a lane towhich traffic arrows apply, anymotor vehiclethat isentering orabout toenter the area at a time when those arrowsare green or yellow. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Arider ofa bicycle thatis in abicycle storagearea thatextends across more than 1 lane of amulti-lane road must, if the area is before any green or yellowtraffic lights, give way to a motor vehicle that is in any laneother than the lane that the bicycle is directly in front of,unless the motor vehicle is turning in adirection that is subject to a red traffic arrow.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.248 No riding across a road on particularcrossings (1) The rider of a bicycle must not rideacross a road, or a part of a road, on achildren’s crossing or a pedestrian crossing. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) The rider of abicycle must not ride across a road, or a part ofaroad, on a marked foot crossing, unless— (a)ifthere are bicycle crossing lights at the crossing—(i) the rider is, under this regulation,permitted to ride on the crossing; and Page 260Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 15Additional rules for bicycle riders [s 249]Note — See sections 260to 262 in relation to circumstances in which a rider ofa bicycle is permitted to cross a road at bicycle crossinglights. (ii) therider— (A) proceeds slowly and safely; and(B) gives way to any pedestrian on thecrossing; and (C) keeps to theleft of any oncoming rider of a bicycleor person whois using apersonal mobility device;or (b) if there are no bicycle crossinglights at the crossing— (i) a pedestrian is,under this regulation, permitted to cross on thecrossing; and Note— See section 231in relation to circumstances in which a pedestrian ispermitted to cross a road at pedestrian lights. (ii)therider— (A) proceeds slowly and safely; and(B) gives way to any pedestrian on thecrossing; and (C) keeps to theleft of any oncoming rider of a bicycleor person whois using apersonal mobilitydevice. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) In this section— pedestrian doesnot include aperson usinga personal mobilitydevice. 249 Riding on a separated footpathTherider of a bicycle must not ride on a part of a separatedfootpath designated for the use ofpedestrians. Current as at 7 April 2014Page261
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 15 Additional rules for bicycleriders [s 250] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 250 Riding on afootpath or shared path (1) Subject tosubsection (1A), the rider of a bicycle riding on afootpath or shared path must—(a) keep to the left of the footpath orshared path unless it is impracticable to do so; and(b) give wayto any pedestrian onthe footpath orshared path.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(1A) Subsection (1)does not apply to a person riding a bicycle on afootpath if a local law otherwiseprovides. (2) In this section— footpathdoesnot include a separated footpath. pedestrian doesnot include aperson usinga personal mobilitydevice. 251 Riding to the left of oncoming bicycleriders or device users on a path Therider ofa bicycle ridingon a bicyclepath, footpath,separated footpath or shared path must keepto the left of any oncoming bicycle rider, or person using apersonal mobility device, on the path. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 252 No bicycles signsand markings (1) The rider of a bicycle must not rideon a length of road or footpath towhich ano bicycles sign,or a nobicycles roadmarking, applies. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Page 262 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 15Additional rules for bicycle riders [s 252](2) A no bicycles sign, or a no bicyclesroad marking, applies to a length of road or footpath beginningat the sign or marking and ending at the nearest of thefollowing— (a) a bicycle path sign or bicycle pathroad marking; (b) a bicycle lane sign;(c) a separatedfootpath signor separated footpathroad marking;(d) a shared path sign;(e) an end no bicycles sign;(f) the next intersection.Examples —Nobicycles sign Bicycle lane sign Current as at 7April 2014 Bicycle path sign Separatedfootpath sign Page 263
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 15 Additional rules for bicycleriders [s 253] Shared pathsign End no bicycles sign 253Bicycle riders not to cause a traffichazard The rider ofa bicycle mustnot cause atraffic hazardby moving into the path of a driver orpedestrian. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.254 Bicycles being towed etc.(1) A person must not ride on a bicyclethat is being towed by another vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Therider ofa bicycle mustnot hold ontoanother vehiclewhile the vehicle is moving.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.255 Riding too close to the rear of amotor vehicle The rider of a bicycle must not ride within2m of the rear of a moving motor vehicle continuously for morethan 200m. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.256 Bicycle helmets (1)Therider of a bicycle must wear an approved bicycle helmetsecurely fitted and fastened on the rider’shead. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page264 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 15Additional rules for bicycle riders [s 257](2) A passenger on a bicycle that ismoving, or is stationary but notparked, mustwear anapproved bicyclehelmet securelyfitted andfastened onthe passenger’s head,unless thepassenger is a paying passenger on a three-or four-wheeled bicycle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The rider of abicycle must not ride with a passenger on the bicycle unlessthe passenger complies with subsection (2). Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) Aperson isexempt fromwearing abicycle helmetunder subsection (1)or (2) ifthe person iscarrying acurrent doctor’scertificate stating that, for a stated period— (a)the person cannot wear abicycle helmetfor medical reasons;or (b) because ofa physical characteristic ofthe person, itwould be unreasonable to require the personto wear a bicycle helmet. (5)Aperson is also exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet undersubsection (1) or (2) if—(a) the person is a member of a religiousgroup; and (b) the person is wearing a type ofheaddress customarily worn by members of the group;and (c) the wearing of the headdress makes itimpractical for the person to wear a bicycle helmet.257 Riding with a person on a bicycletrailer (1) The rider of a bicycle must not tow abicycle trailer with a person in or on the bicycle trailer,unless— (a) the rider is 16 years old, or older;and (b) the person in or on the bicycletrailer is under 10 years old; and (c)thebicycle trailer can safely carry the person; andCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page265
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 15 Additional rules for bicycleriders [s 258] (d)the person inor on thebicycle traileris wearing anapproved bicycle helmet securely fitted andfastened on the person’s head. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (1A) Aperson isexempt fromwearing abicycle helmetif the personis carrying acurrent doctor’scertificate statingthat, for a statedperiod— (a) the personcan not weara bicycle helmetfor medical reasons;or (b) because ofa physical characteristic ofthe person, itwould be unreasonable to require the personto wear a bicycle helmet. (1B)Aperson is also exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet if—(a) the person is a member of a religiousgroup; and (b) the person is wearing a type ofheaddress customarily worn by members of the group;and (c) the wearing of the headdress makes itimpractical for the person to wear a bicycle helmet.(2) In this section— bicycletrailer means a vehicle that is built to be towed,or is towed, by a bicycle. 258Equipment on a bicycle A person mustnot ride a bicycle that does not have— (a)atleast 1 effective brake; and (b)abell, horn or similar warning device in working order.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page266 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 15Additional rules for bicycle riders [s 259]259 Riding at night The rider of abicycle must not ride at night, or in hazardous weatherconditions causingreduced visibility, unlessthe bicycle or rider displays—(a) a flashing or steady white light thatis clearly visible for at least 200m from the front of thebicycle; and (b) a flashing or steady red light that isclearly visible for at least 200m from the rear of thebicycle; and (c) a redreflector thatis clearly visiblefor at least50m from the rear of the bicycle whenlight is projected onto it by a vehicle’s headlight onlow-beam. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.260 Stopping for a red bicycle crossinglight (1) The rider of a bicycle approaching orat bicycle crossing lights showing a red bicycle crossing lightmust stop before reaching the bicycle crossing lights.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) The rider must not proceeduntil— (a) the bicycle crossing lights change togreen; or (b) there is no red bicycle crossing lightshowing. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example —Redbicycle crossing light Current as at 7 April 2014Green bicycle crossing lightPage267
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 15 Additional rules for bicycleriders [s 261] 261Stopping for a yellow bicycle crossinglight (1) The riderof a bicycleapproaching bicyclecrossing lightsshowing a yellow bicycle crossing light mustcomply with this section. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Ifthe rider canstop safelybefore reachingthe bicycle crossing lights,the bicycle rider must stop before reaching the lights.(3) If the rider stops before reaching thebicycle crossing lights, and thelights changeto red, thebicycle ridermust notproceed until— (a)thebicycle crossing lights change to green; or (b)there is no red or yellow bicycle crossinglight showing. Example —Yellow bicycle crossing light262 Proceeding when bicycle crossinglights change to yellow or red (1)Therider of a bicycle who is crossing at an intersection, oranother placeon a road,with bicyclecrossing lightsand traffic lights must comply with thissection. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If thebicycle crossinglights changefrom greento yellow, flashing yellow,red or flashing red while the rider is crossing the road, therider must not stay on the road for longer than necessaryto cross safelyto the nearer(in the directionof travel of the rider) of thefollowing— Page 268 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 263](a) a dividing strip,safety zone, or traffic island,forming part of the areaset aside or used by riders of bicycles to cross the roadat the intersection or place (a safetyarea ); (b) the far side ofthe road. (2A) Despitesubsection (2), the rider may instead return to the sideofthe road, or a safety area, that the rider has just left,but only if— (a)atthe time the lights change, that side or safety area iscloser to the rider than the side or safetyarea the rider was approaching at the time; and(b) the riderdoes notstay onthe road forlonger thanis necessary to return to that side orsafety area. (3) If, under subsection (2) or (2A), therider crosses, or returns, to a safety area, the rider mustremain in the safety area until the bicyclecrossing lights change to green. (4)However, ifthe rider cannot operate thebicycle crossinglights from the safety area, the rider maycross to the far side of the road when— (a)thetraffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, orthere is no red traffic light showing;and (b) it is safe to do so.(5) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. Part 16Rules for persons travelling inoron vehicles 263 Application of part to persons in oron trams This part, except section 269(1), does notapply to a person in or on a tram. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 269
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules for persons travelling inor on vehicles [s 264] 264Wearing of seatbelts by drivers(1) The driver of a motor vehicle that ismoving, or is stationary but not parked, must comply with thissection if the driver’s seating position is fitted with anapproved seatbelt. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) The drivermust wearthe seatbelt properlyadjusted andfastened unless the driver is—(a) reversing the vehicle; or(b) exempt from wearing a seatbelt undersection 267. 265 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16years old or older (1) A passenger in or on a motor vehiclethat is moving, or that is stationary but not parked, must complywith subsection (2) if the passenger— (a)is16 years old or older; and (b) is not exemptfrom wearing a seatbelt under section 267. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Thepassenger— (a) must occupya seating positionthat isfitted withan approved seatbelt; and(b) must notoccupy thesame seatingposition asanother passenger(whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing aseatbelt under section 267); and (c)mustwear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.(3) The driverof a motorvehicle (excepta bus ortaxi) thatis moving, or that is stationary but notparked, must ensure that each passengerin or onthe vehicle whois 16 yearsold or oldercomplies withsubsection (2),unless thepassenger isexempt from wearing a seatbelt under section267. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page270 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 266]266 Wearing of seatbelts by passengersunder 16 years old (1) The driver of a motor vehicle (excepta bus or motorbike) that is moving, or is stationary but notparked, must ensure that this section is complied with for eachpassenger in or on the vehicle who is under 16 yearsold. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the passenger is less than 6 monthsold, the passenger must be restrained in a suitable andproperly fastened and adjusted rearward facingapproved child restraint. (2A) If the passengeris 6 months old or older, but is less than 4 years old, thepassenger must be restrained in a suitable and properlyfastened and adjusted— (a) rearward facingapproved child restraint; or (b)forward facingapproved childrestraint thathas an inbuiltharness. (2B) If the passengeris 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 yearsold,the passenger must— (a) be restrained ina suitable andproperly fastenedand adjusted forward facing approved childrestraint that has an inbuilt harness; or (b)be placed ona properly positioned approvedbooster seatand be restrained byan approved seatbeltthat isproperly adjusted and fastened; or(c) if the passenger is seated in aseating position in a part of the vehicle that is designedprimarily for the carriage of goods— (i)berestrained by an approved seatbelt of a lap and sash type thatis properly adjusted and fastened; or (ii)havethe midsection of his or her body restrained byan approved seatbeltof a laptype thatis properly adjusted and fastened, andhave his or her upper body restrained by an approved childsafety harness that is properly adjusted andfastened. Current as at 7 April 2014Page271
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules for persons travelling inor on vehicles [s 266] (3)Apassenger who is under 4 years old must not be in the frontrowof a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats.(3A) Apassenger whois 4 yearsold or older,but is lessthan 7years old, must not be in the front row of amotor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats unless in therow or rows behind the front row— (a)allof the other seats are occupied by passengers who arealsoless than 7 years old; or (b) thereis no remainingseating positionin which thepassenger cansit in accordance withthis sectionbecause of the occupation of other seats, incompliance with this section, by passengers who arealso less than 7 years old. Example— This subsection would permit apassenger who is 6 years old to sit in the front row of avehicle that has 2 rows of seats if 2 occupied approvedchildrestraints in the back row encroached on an empty seatingposition between them in a way that made itimpossible for another approved child restraintor booster seat to be placed in that position. (4)If the passengeris 7 yearsold or olderbut under 16years old—(a) the passenger must be restrained in asuitable approved child restraint that is properly adjustedand fastened; or (b) the passenger— (i)mustoccupy a seating position that is fitted with a suitableapproved seatbelt; and (ii) mustnot occupy thesame seatingposition asanother passenger(whether ornot the otherpassenger is exempt from wearing a seatbeltunder section 267); and (iii)must wearthe seatbelt properlyadjusted andfastened. (4A)Subsections (2),(2A), (2B)and (4) donot apply ifthe passenger isexempt fromwearing aseatbelt undersection 267.Page272 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 266](4B) Ifa passenger cannot safely berestrained asrequired bysubsection (2) because of the passenger’sheight or weight, the passenger must be restrained as ifsubsection (2A) applied to the passenger. (4C)If a passengercan not safelybe restrained asrequired bysubsection (2A) or (4B) because of thepassenger’s height or weight, the passenger must berestrained as if subsection (2B) applied to thepassenger. (4D) Ifa passenger cannot safely berestrained asrequired bysubsection (2B) or (4C) because of thepassenger’s height or weight, the passenger must berestrained as if subsection (4) applied to thepassenger. (4E) In the case of apassenger sitting in a seating position that is fittedwith alap and sashtype seatbelt,it is sufficient compliance withsubsection (2B)(b) or (4)(b)(iii), as the case may be, if,instead of using the sash part of the seatbelt, anapproved childsafety harnessthat isproperly adjustedand fastened is used to restrain the upperbody of the passenger. (5) The driver of ataxi is exempt from subsections (2), (2A) and (2B) in relationto a passenger if— (a) there is no suitable approved childrestraint available in the taxi for the passenger; and(b) if the taxi has 2 or more rows ofseats—the passenger is not in the front row of seats.(6) For this section— (a)an approved childrestraint isavailable inthe motor vehicle for apassenger if an approved child restraint is fitted in thevehicle and is not occupied by someone else under 16 yearsold; and (b) an approvedchild restraintor approved seatbeltis suitable for a passenger if it issuitable for restraining, or to be worn bythe passenger. (6A) For thissection, a child restraint that is properly fastened andadjusted— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 273
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules for persons travelling inor on vehicles [s 266] (a)is forward facingif, once itrestrains apassenger, thepassenger’s head is closer to the rear ofthe vehicle than the passenger’s feet; or (b)isrearward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, thepassenger’s feet are closer to the rear ofthe vehicle than the passenger’s head. (7)Inthis section— approved booster seat means—(a) a booster seat or cushion thatcomplies with— (i) AS/NZS 1754; or (ii)another standard the chief executiveconsiders is at least equal to that standard; or(b) a child restraint that—(i) is incorporated in a vehicle;and (ii) is of a typementioned in— (A) the VehicleStandard (Australian DesignRule34/01—Child Restraint Anchorages and ChildRestraint AnchorFittings) 2005(Cwlth), clause 34.8; or (B)the Vehicle Standard(Australian DesignRule34/02—Child Restraint Anchorages and ChildRestraint AnchorFittings) 2012(Cwlth), clause 34.9; and(iii) complies withthat clause. approved child restraint means a childrestraint that complies with— (a)AS/NZS 1754; or (b)another standard the chief executiveconsiders is at least equal to that standard.approved child safety harnessmeans a harness that complieswith— (a)AS/NZS 1754; or Page 274Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 267](b) another standard the chief executiveconsiders is at least equal to that standard.267 Exemptions from wearingseatbelts (1A) A person in oron a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbeltif— (a) the seating position that the personoccupies is not fitted with a seatbelt; and(b) there isno requirement forthat seatingposition tobe fitted with a seatbelt; and(c) all passengers inthe vehicle whoare exempt fromwearing a seatbelt are complying withsubsection (8). (1B) Subsection (1A)does not apply to a person who is under 7 yearsold. (1C) To remove anydoubt, it is declared that subsection (1A) does notauthorise apassenger towhom section266(3) or(3A) applies tooccupy a seat in the front row of seats in a vehiclethathas 2 or more rows of seats. (2)Aperson in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing aseatbelt if— (a)the person isengaged inthe door-to-door deliveryor collection ofgoods, orin the collection ofwaste orgarbage, and is required to get in or out ofthe vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequentintervals; and (b) the vehicle is not travelling over25km/h. (3A) A person isexempt from wearing a seatbelt if— (a)theperson (or, for a passenger, the driver of the vehicleinor on which the person is a passenger) is carrying acertificate that— (i)issigned by a doctor; and (ii) states that, inthe opinion of the doctor, the person shouldnot wear aseatbelt dueto the person’smedical condition; and Current as at 7April 2014 Page 275
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules for persons travelling inor on vehicles [s 267] (iii)displays a date of issue; and(iv) displays anexpiry date that is a date not more than 12 months afterthe date of issue; and (v) has not expired;and (b) the personis complying withany conditions statedin the certificate. (4)However, a person is not exempt undersubsection (3A) if the person (or, for a passenger, thedriver of the vehicle in or on whichthe person isa passenger) doesnot immediately producethe certificate mentionedin the subsection forinspection when a police officer asks theperson (or the driver) whether the person is exempt fromwearing a seatbelt. (5) A person is exempt from wearing aseatbelt if— (a) the person is a passenger in or on apolice or emergency vehicle; and (b)either— (i)if the vehiclehas 2 ormore rowsof seats—the person is not inthe front row of seats or there is not aseating positionavailable forthe person inanother row of seats; or (ii)ifthe vehicle is a police vehicle and has a caged, orother secured,area designedfor the carriageof passengers—the person occupies aseating position in that area. (6)Aperson is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if the person isproviding orreceiving medicaltreatment ofan urgent andnecessary nature while in or on avehicle. (7) If a truck or bus has a sleepercompartment, a two-up driver of the truck or busis exempt from wearing a seatbelt while the two-updriver occupiesthe sleeper compartment forrest purposes.(8) If avehicle doesnot have approvedseatbelts orapproved child restraintsfitted to all its passenger seating positions, aPage276 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 268]passenger who is exempt from wearing aseatbelt under this section must not occupy— (a)a seating positionthat isfitted withan approved seatbelt;or (b) an approved child restraint;ifthe result would be that a passenger who is not exempt fromwearing aseatbelt underthis sectionwould berequired tooccupy a seating position that is not fittedwith an approved seatbelt or an approved childrestraint. (8A) A person isexempt from wearing a seatbelt while the person is driving ataxi with 1 or more passengers in it. (8B)Apassenger on a bus is exempt from wearing a seatbelt whilethepassenger is— (a) a standingpassenger mentionedin the TransportOperations (Passenger Transport) Standard2010 ,section 11(2)(c) and (d); or(b) entering or leaving the bus.(9) In this section— two-updriver ,for a vehiclethat isa bus ortruck, meansa person accompanying the vehicle’sdriver on a journey or part of a journey,who has been, is or will be, sharing the task ofdriving the vehicle during thejourney. 268 How persons must travel in or on amotor vehicle (1) A person must not travel in or on apart of a motor vehicle that is not a partdesigned primarily for the carriage of passengersorgoods. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A person must not travel in or on apart of a motor vehicle that is a partdesigned primarily for the carriage of goods unless—(a) the part is enclosed; andCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page277
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules for persons travelling inor on vehicles [s 268] (b)theperson occupies a seating position that is suitable forthesize and weight of the person and is fitted with anapproved seatbelt. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) A person mustnot travel in or on a motor vehicle with any partof the person’sbody outsidea window ordoor ofthe vehicle, unless the person is thedriver of the vehicle and is giving a handsignal— (a) for changingdirection tothe right inaccordance withsection 50; or (b)forstopping or slowing in accordance with section 55.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) The driver of a motor vehicle (excepta bus) must not drive with a passenger if any part of thepassenger’s body is outside a window or doorof the vehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4A) The driver of amotor vehicle must not drive with a passenger inor on apart ofthe vehicle thatis not apart designedprimarily for the carriage of passengers orgoods. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4B) The driver of amotor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or on a partof the vehicle that is a part designed primarilyforthe carriage of goods unless— (a)thepart is enclosed; and (b) the personoccupies a seating position that is suitable forthesize and weight of the person and is fitted with anapproved seatbelt. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5) This sectiondoes not apply to a person who is— (a)inor on a police or emergency vehicle; or (b)on amotorbike; or Page 278 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 269](c) engaged inthe door-to-door deliveryor collection ofgoods, or in the collection of waste orgarbage, in or on a motor vehicle that is not travelling over25km/h. (6) In this section— enclosed,for a part of a vehicle— (a) means enclosedby the structure of the vehicle; but (b)doesnot include enclosed by a canopy or cage fitted tothevehicle. 269 Opening doors and getting out of avehicle etc. (1) A person must not get off, or out of,a moving vehicle, unless the personis engaged inthe door-to-door deliveryor collection of goods, or in thecollection of waste or garbage, and the vehicleis not travelling over 5km/h. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) Subsection (1)does not apply to a person getting off a bicycleoranimal. (3) A person must not cause a hazard toany person or vehicle by opening a door of a vehicle, leaving adoor of a vehicle open, or getting off, or out of, avehicle. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) The driver of a bus must not drive thebus unless the doors of the bus are closed while the bus ismoving. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.270 Wearing motorbike helmets(1) The rider of a motorbike that ismoving, or is stationary but not parked,must— (a) wear an approved motorbike helmetsecurely fitted and fastened on the rider’s head; and(b) not ride with a passenger unless thepassenger complies with subsection (2). Current as at 7April 2014 Page 279
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules for persons travelling inor on vehicles [s 271] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A passenger on amotorbike that is moving, or is stationary butnot parked, mustwear anapproved motorbikehelmet securely fittedand fastened on the passenger’s head. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) In thissection— approved motorbikehelmet meansa helmet thatcomplies with—(a) AS 1698; or (b)AS/NZS 1698; or (c)another standard the chief executiveconsiders is at least equal to a standard mentioned inparagraph (a) or (b). passenger , of amotorbike, includes a person on a passenger seatof the motorbike, includingthe pillion seat,or in asidecar. 271Riding on motorbikes (1)The rider ofa motorbike thatis moving (otherthan arider who is walkingbeside and pushing a motorbike), or the rider of a motorbikethat is stationary but not parked, must— (a)sitastride the rider’s seat facing forwards; and (b)ridewith at least 1 hand on the handlebars; and (c)if the motorbikeis moving—keep bothfeet onthe footrests designed for use by therider of the motorbike. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) A passenger on a motorbike (except apassenger in a sidecar or ona seat, otherthan apillion seat,designed fora passenger) thatis moving, oris stationary butnot parked, must—(a) sit astride the pillion seat facingforwards; and (b) keep bothfeet onthe footrests designedfor use bya pillion passenger on themotorbike. Page 280 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 16 Rules forpersons travelling in or on vehicles [s 272]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The riderof a motorbikemust notride witha passenger (excepta passenger ina sidecar oron a seat,other thana pillion seat,designed fora passenger) unlessthe passenger complies withsubsection (2). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) The riderof a motorbikemust notride withmore than1 passenger (excluding any passenger ina sidecar or on a seat, other than a pillion seat, designedfor a passenger). Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5) The rider of a motorbike must not ridewith more passengers in a sidecar, or on a seat designedfor a passenger, than the sidecar or seat is designed tocarry. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5A) Therider ofa motorbike mustnot ride witha passenger (excepta passenger ina sidecar) unlessthe passenger isat least 8 years old. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5B) A passenger mustnot ride in a sidecar of a motorbike unless the passenger isseated safely. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5C) The rider of amotorbike must not ride with a passenger in a sidecar unlessthe passenger complies with subsection (5B). Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 272 Interfering withthe driver’s control of the vehicle etc. A passenger inor on a vehicle must not— (a) interfere withthe driver’s control of the vehicle; or (b)obstruct the driver’s view of the road ortraffic. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page281
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 17 Additional rules for drivers oftrams, tram recovery vehicles and buses [s 273]Part17 Additional rules for drivers oftrams, tram recovery vehiclesandbuses Division 1 Trams273 Division also applies to tram recoveryvehicles and buses travelling along tram tracks(1) This division applies to the driver ofa tram recovery vehicle as if a reference in the division to atram included a reference to a tram recovery vehicle.(2) This divisionapplies tothe driver ofa bus travelling alongtramtracks as if a reference in the division to a tram includedareference to a bus travelling along tram tracks.274 Stopping for a red T lightThedriver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a redTlight must stop— (a) if there is a stop line at or near theT lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching, thestop line; or (b) if there is no stop line at or nearthe T lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching,the nearest or only T lights. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 275 Stopping for ayellow T light The driver ofa tram approaching orat T lightsshowing ayellow T light must stop—(a) if there is a stop line at or near theT lights and the driver can stop safely before reaching thestop line—as near as practicable to, but before reaching,the stop line; or Page 282 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 17Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram recovery vehicles andbuses [s 276] (b)if there isno stop lineator near the T lights and the driver can stopsafely before reaching the T lights—as near aspracticable to, but before reaching, the nearest oronlyT lights. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.276 Exception to stopping for a red oryellow T light The driver of a tram approaching or at Tlights showing a red or yellow T light does not have tostop if a white traffic arrow isalso showingand the driveris turning inthe direction indicated by thearrow. 277 Proceeding after stopping for a red oryellow T light The driver of a tram who stops for T lightsshowing a red or yellow T light must not proceeduntil— (a) a white T light is showing; or(b) no T light is showing and trafficlights at or near the T lights are showing a green trafficlight. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.278 Proceeding when a red traffic lightand a white T light or white traffic arrow is showing(1) The driver of a tram approaching or ata white T light at or near trafficlights showinga red trafficlight mayproceed straight ahead,or turn, despite the red traffic light. (2)Thedriver of a tram approaching or at a white traffic arrow atornear traffic lights showing a red traffic light may turn inthe direction indicated by the arrow, despitethe red traffic light. Current as at 7 April 2014Page283
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 17 Additional rules for drivers oftrams, tram recovery vehicles and buses [s 279]Example —White T light 279Proceeding when a white T light or whitetraffic arrow is no longer showing (1)Thissection applies to— (a) the driverof a tramat an intersection withT lights showing a whiteT light who has stopped after the stop line, or nearestor only T lights, at the intersection; or (b)thedriver of a tram at an intersection with traffic arrowsshowing awhite trafficarrow whois turning inthe direction indicated by the arrow andhas stopped after the stop line,or nearest oronly trafficarrows, atthe intersection. Example— The driver of a tram may stop afterthe stop line at an intersection with T lights showing awhite T light, and not proceed through the intersection,because the intersection, or a road beyondthe intersection, is blocked by traffic.(2) If the T lights or traffic arrowschange to yellow or red, or turn off, while thedriver is stopped and the driver has not enteredtheintersection, the driver must not proceed until—(a) a white T light is showing; or(b) there is no T light showing, andtraffic lights at or near the T lights are showing a greentraffic light; or (c) if the driver is turning at theintersection—a white traffic arrowisshowing that indicatesthedirection in which the driver isturning. Page 284 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 17Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram recovery vehicles andbuses [s 280] Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) If the T lightsor traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turnoff,while the driver is stopped and the driver has entered theintersection, the driver must leave theintersection as soon as the driver can do so safely.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Division 2 Buses, taxis andbicycles 280 Application of division(1) This division applies to any of thefollowing who is driving in a buslane— (a) the driver of a bus;(b) the driver of a taxi;(c) the rider of a bicycle.(2) This divisionapplies tothe driver ofa vehicle otherthan abus,taxi or bicycle in the same way as it applies to the driverof abus, if— (a) the driveris driving ina bus laneto which Blights apply;and (b) the driveris permitted todrive inthe lane underthis regulation. 281Stopping for a red B lightThe driver ofa bus ortaxi, orthe rider ofa bicycle, approaching orat B lights showing a red B light must stop— (a)ifthere is a stop line at or near the B lights—as near aspracticable to, but before reaching, thestop line; or (b) if there is no stop line at or nearthe B lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching,the nearest or only B lights. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 285
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 17 Additional rules for drivers oftrams, tram recovery vehicles and buses [s 282]Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.282 Stopping for a yellow B lightThe driver ofa bus ortaxi, orthe rider ofa bicycle, approaching orat B lightsshowing ayellow Blight muststop— (a)ifthere is a stop line at or near the B lights and the driverorrider can stop safely before reaching the stop line—asnearas practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line;or (b) if there is nostop line at or near the B lights and the driveror rider canstop safelybefore reachingthe B lights—asnear aspracticable to,but before reaching,thenearest or only B lights. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. 283 Exception to stopping for a red oryellow B light The driver ofa bus ortaxi, orthe rider ofa bicycle, approaching orat B lightsshowing ared or yellowB light does not have tostop if a white traffic arrow is also showing and the driveror rider is turning in the direction indicated bythearrow. 284 Proceeding after stopping for a red oryellow B light The driver of a bus or taxi, or the rider ofa bicycle, who stops for B lights showing a red or yellow Blight must not proceed until— (a)awhite B light is showing; or (b)no Blight is showing and traffic lights at or near the Blights are showing a green trafficlight. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page286 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 17Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram recovery vehicles andbuses [s 285] 285Proceeding when a red traffic light and awhite B light or white traffic arrow is showing(1) The driverof a busor taxi, orthe rider ofa bicycle, approaching orat a whiteB light ator near trafficlights showing a redtraffic light may proceed straight ahead, or turn,despite the red traffic light.(2) The driverof a busor taxi, orthe rider ofa bicycle, approaching orat a white traffic arrow at or near traffic lightsshowing a red traffic light may turn in thedirection indicated by the arrow, despite the red trafficlight. Example —White B light 286Proceeding when a white B light or whitetraffic arrow is no longer showing (1)Thissection applies to— (a) the driver of a bus or taxi, or therider of a bicycle, at an intersection with B lights showing awhite B light who has stopped afterthe stop line,or nearest oronly Blights, at the intersection; or(b) the driver of a bus or taxi, or therider of a bicycle, at an intersection with traffic arrowsshowing a white traffic arrow who is turning in the directionindicated by the arrow and has stopped after the stop line,or nearest or only traffic arrows, at theintersection. Example —Thedriver of a bus or taxi, or the rider of a bicycle, may stop afterthe stop line at an intersection with B lightsshowing a white B light, and Current as at 7April 2014 Page 287
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s287] not proceed through the intersection,because the intersection, or a road beyond theintersection, is blocked by traffic. (2)Ifthe B lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, orturn off,while thedriver orrider isstopped andhas not entered theintersection, the driver or rider must not proceeduntil— (a)awhite B light is showing; or (b)there is no B light showing, and trafficlights at or near the B lights are showing a green trafficlight; or (c) if thedriver orrider isturning atthe intersection—a whitetraffic arrowis showing thatindicates thedirection in which the driver or rider isturning. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) If the B lights or traffic arrowschange to yellow or red, or turn off, whilethe driver or rider is stopped and has entered theintersection, the driver or rider must leave theintersection as soon as the driver or rider can do sosafely. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Part18 Miscellaneous road rules Division 1Miscellaneous rules for drivers287 Duties of a driver involved in acrash (1) This section applies to a driverinvolved in a crash. (2) The driver muststop at the scene of the crash and give the driver’srequired particulars, within the required time and, ifpracticable, at the scene of the crash,to— (a) any other driver (or that driver’srepresentative) involved in the crash; and Page 288Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 287] (b)anyother person involved in the crash who is injured, ortheperson’s representative; and (c)the owner ofany property (including anyvehicle) damagedin the crash(or the owner’srepresentative), unless, in thecase of damage to a vehicle, the particulars aregiven tothe driver ofthe vehicle (orthe driver’s representative). Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) Thedriver mustalso givethe driver’s requiredparticulars, within therequired time, to a police officer if— (a)anyone is killed or injured in the crash;or (b) the driverdoes not,for any reason,give thedriver’s requiredparticulars toeach personmentioned insubsection (2); or (c)therequired particulars for any other driver involved inthecrash are not given to the driver; or (d)amotor vehicle involved in the crash is towed or carriedawayby another vehicle; or (e) property, exceptthe driver’s motor vehicle, is damaged to the value ofat least the amount fixed for the purpose of section92(1)(i) of the Act. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (4) The amount fixed for the purpose ofsection 92(1)(i) of the Act is $2500. (5)Inthis section— required particulars ,for a driverinvolved ina crash, means—(a) the driver’s name and address;and (b) the nameand address ofthe owner ofthe driver’s vehicle;and (c) the vehicle’s registration number, ifany; and (d) any other information necessary toidentify the vehicle. Current as at 7 April 2014Page289
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s288] required time , for a driverinvolved in a crash, means as soon as possible but,except in exceptional circumstances, within 24 hours afterthe crash. 288 Driving on a path (1)Adriver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive on apath, unless subsection (2) or (3) appliesto the driver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver may drive on a path if thedriver is— (a) driving on a part of the pathindicated by information on or with atraffic control device as a part where vehicles may drive;or (b) driving onthe path toenter orleave, bythe shortest practicable route,a road-related areaor adjacent landand there isnot a partof the pathindicated byinformation on or with a traffic controldevice as a part where vehicles may drive.(3) A driver may drive a motorisedwheelchair on a path if— (a) the unladen massof the wheelchair is not over 150kg; and(b) the wheelchair is not travelling over10km/h; and (c) because of the driver’s physicalcondition, the driver has a reasonable need to use awheelchair. (4) A driver on a path (except the riderof a bicycle, or a driver driving on the path to enter a roadfrom a road-related area or adjacent land,or to enter a road-related area or adjacent landfrom aroad) mustgive wayto all otherroad users,and to animals, on thepath. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(5) This section does not apply to therider of an animal riding the animal on afootpath. (6) In this section— pathmeans a bicycle path, footpath or sharedpath. Page 290 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 289] 289Driving on a nature strip(1) A driver must not drive on a naturestrip adjacent to a length of road in a built-up area, unless thedriver is— (a) entering or leaving, by the shortestpracticable route, an area on the nature strip indicated byinformation on or with a traffic control device as an areawhere vehicles may drive; or (b)driving ona part ofthe nature stripindicated byinformation on or with a traffic controldevice as a part where vehicles may drive; or(c) driving onthe nature stripto enter orleave, bythe shortest practicable route, aroad-related area or adjacent land and thereis not a part of the nature strip indicated by informationon or with a traffic control device as a part wherevehicles may drive; or (d) riding a bicycleor animal; or (e) driving a ride-on lawnmower that iscutting grass on the nature strip; or (f)driving a motorised wheelchair.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driverdriving ona nature strip(except therider ofan animal, or a driver driving on thenature strip to enter a road froma road-related areaor adjacent land,or to entera road-related area or adjacent landfrom a road) must give way to all other road users, and toanimals, on the nature strip. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 290 Driving on atraffic island A driver must not drive on a traffic island(except the central traffic islandin a roundabout), unlessthe traffic islandis designed to allow vehicles to bedriven on it. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page291
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s291] 291 Making unnecessary noise orsmoke (1) A person must not— (a)start a vehicle, or drive a vehicle, in away that makes unnecessary noise or smoke; or(b) wilfully start a vehicle, or drive avehicle, in a way that makes unnecessary noise orsmoke. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Example for paragraph (a)— driving a vehicle in a way that causesnoise or smoke because of— (a) disrepair of thevehicle; or (b) the way the vehicle is loaded;or (c) the condition, construction oradjustment of the vehicle’s engine or otherequipment Example for paragraph (b)— driving a vehicle in a way that causesnoise or smoke by wilfully and unnecessarilycausing the wheels of the vehicle to lose traction and spinonthe road surface Note — An offenceagainst paragraph (b) is an offence mentioned in thePolice Powers andResponsibilities Act 2000 , section 69A(1)(d).(2) A person must not drive a vehicle towhich a noisy instrument is attached or on which a noisyinstrument is used. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The driverof a vehicleor a passengerin or onthe vehicle must not—(a) ring abell orsound ahorn, excepta horn orsimilar warning deviceunder section 224; or (b) play or use anoisy instrument. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page292 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 292] 292Section number not used 293Removing fallen etc. things from theroad (1) This section applies to a driverif— (a) something falls onto the road from thedriver’s vehicle, or the driver, or a passenger in or on thedriver’s vehicle, puts something on the road; and(b) there is a possibility that the thing,if left on the road, may injure a person, obstruct the pathof other drivers or pedestrians, ordamage avehicle oranything else(for example, theroad surface). (2) The driver must remove the thing, ortake action to have the thing removed, from the road as soonas the driver can do so safely. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. Examples of things —afallen load, oil, grease, a wheel chock, debris from anaccident (3) If something has fallen onto the roadfrom a vehicle because of acrash andthe vehicle istowed awayby a person,the person must remove the thing from theroad as soon as the person can do so safely. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (4) In thissection— put , something onto the road,includes— (a) throw, drop or propel the thing ontothe road; and (b) otherwise cause the thing to be on theroad. 293A Oil and grease Aperson mustnot drive avehicle withouttaking adequateprecautions to stop oil or grease from theengine or another part of the vehicle dropping onto theroad. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Current as at 7 April 2014Page293
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s293B] 293B Restriction on driving or stoppingvehicle on road (1) A person must not drive or stop avehicle on a road for the purpose ofsoliciting employment orbusiness fromthe vehicle, unless the person—(a) is permitted to drive or stop thevehicle for the primary purpose ofbusiness advertising undera permit issuedunder the TrafficRegulation 1962 , section 126(1)(b); or (b)isengaged in roadside vending under a permit or otherauthority given to the person under a locallaw. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— roadincludes a shoulder of a road, a medianstrip, a painted island ora traffic island,but does notinclude anotherroad-related area. 294Keeping control of a vehicle beingtowed (1) The driverof a motorvehicle mustnot tow anothermotor vehicleunless— (a) either— (i)thedriver can control the movement of the towed vehicle;or (ii) the brakes andsteering of the towed vehicle are in workingorder anda person whois licensed todrive the towed vehicle is sitting in thedriver’s seat of the towed vehicle, and is in control ofits brakes and steering; and (b)itis safe to tow the towed vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) The driver of amotor vehicle must not tow a trailer unless— (a)thedriver can control the movement of the trailer; and(b) it is safe to tow the trailer.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page294 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 295] (3)Thedriver of a motor vehicle must not tow a bicycle, wheeledrecreational device, wheeled toy orwheelchair. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) The driverof a motorvehicle, otherthan aheavy vehicle,mustnot tow more than 1 motor vehicle or trailer. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (5) However,the driver maytow a cartowing trailerwith avehicle secured to the trailer if—(a) the trailerhas effective independentbrakes oroverrun brakes;and (b) instructions forsecuring avehicle tothe trailer areattached to the trailer. (6)Inthis section— car towing trailermeans atrailer with1 axle thatallows a vehicle to betowed by securing the wheels of 1 axle of the vehicle to thetrailer. motor vehicle does not includea trailer attached to the motor vehicle.295 Motor vehicle towing another vehiclewith a towline (1) The driver of a motor vehicle towinganother vehicle using a chain, rope, fabric, strap or wire(the towline ) mustcomply with this section. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) If neither ofthe vehicles is a motorbike, the driver must keepadistance of not over 4m between the vehicles. (3)If at least1 of thevehicles isa motorbike, thedriver mustkeepa distance of not over 2.5m between the vehicles.(4) If the towline is longer than 2m, thedriver must attach a white or brightlycoloured flag,piece ofcloth orother similarmaterial (the warningmaterial ) to the towline in accordancewithsubsection (5). Current as at 7 April 2014Page295
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s296] (5) The warning material must—(a) be substantially squareor rectangular with2 adjacent sides at least300mm long; and (b) be attached midway along the towline;and (c) be visiblefor at least100m fromeither sideof the warningmaterial. (6) If thedriver istowing atnight, thedriver mustensure thewarning material is lit by a light attachedto 1 of the vehicles. 296 Driving a vehiclein reverse (1) The driver of a vehicle must notreverse the vehicle unless the driver can do sosafely. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) The driver of a vehicle must notreverse the vehicle further than isreasonable in the circumstances. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 297 Driver to haveproper control of a vehicle etc. (1)Adriver must not drive a vehicle unless the driver has propercontrol of the vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (1A) A driver mustnot drive a vehicle if a person or an animal is inthedriver’s lap. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) A driver must not drive a motorvehicle unless the driver has a clear view ofthe road, and traffic, ahead, behind and to eachsideof the driver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(3) The rider of a motorbike must not ridewith an animal on the motorbike between the rider and thehandle bars, or in another Page 296 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 298] position thatinterferes with the rider’s ability to control themotorbike or to have a clear view of theroad. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(4) Subsection (3) does not apply to therider of a motorbike who rides with an animal between the riderand the handle bars for a distanceof not morethan 500metres ona road forthe purpose of a farming activity that therider is carrying out. 298 Driving with aperson in a trailer A driver must not drive a motor vehicletowing a trailer with a person in or on the trailer.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.299 Television receivers and visualdisplay units in motor vehicles (1)Adriver must not drive a motor vehicle that has a televisionreceiver or visual display unit in or on thevehicle operating while the vehicle is moving, or isstationary but not parked, if any part of theimage on the screen— (a) is visible tothe driver from the normal driving position; or(b) is likely to distract anotherdriver. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) This section does not apply to thedriver if— (a) the driver is driving a bus and thevisual display unit is, or displays, a destination sign orother bus sign; or (b) the visual display unit is, or is partof, a driver’s aid; or Examples of driver’s aids— • closed-circuittelevision security cameras • dispatchsystem • navigational orintelligent highwayand vehicle systemequipment Current as at 7April 2014 Page 297
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s300] • rearview screens •ticket-issuing machines •vehicle monitoring devices(ba) the visualdisplay unit is a mobile data terminal fitted toapolice vehicle or an emergency vehicle. 300Useof mobile phones (1) The driver of a vehicle (except anemergency vehicle or police vehicle) mustnot use a mobile phone that the driver is holdingin the driver’shand whilethe vehicle ismoving, oris stationary but not parked.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— mobilephone doesnot include aCB radio orany other two-wayradio. use , inrelation toa mobile phone,includes anyof the following— (a)holding thephone to,or near, theear, whetheror not engaged in aphone call; (b) writing, sending or reading a textmessage on the phone; (c) turning thephone on or off; (d) operating any other function of thephone. 300A Drinking liquor while driving(1) The following persons must not drinkliquor— (a) the driver of a vehicle while drivingthe vehicle; (b) a supervisor of a learner while thelearner is driving a motor vehicle under the direction ofthe supervisor. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) In this section— learnerseethe Act, section 79AA(4). Page 298 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 300C] supervisor , of a learner,means a person— (a) with whoma learner isauthorised todrive underthe person’s directionunder theTransport Operations (Road UseManagement—Driver Licensing) Regulation 2010;or (b) who purports to be a person mentionedin paragraph (a). 300C Limitation on use of wheeledrecreational device or wheeled toy (1)A person mustnot travel inor on awheeled recreational device orwheeled toy if a propellant is attached to it or theperson. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) In thissection— propellant meansa machine (otherthan alever, wheeland axle, pulley,screw, wedgeor inclined plane)capable ofpropelling a wheeled recreational device orwheeled toy. 300D Driver must not damage railinfrastructure or obstruct level crossing (1)A driver mustnot cause damageto rail infrastructure ata railway crossing, unless the driverhas a reasonable excuse. Maximum penalty—80 penaltyunits. (2) A driver driving near, on or through alevel crossing must not cause anobstruction tothe path oftrains orother driversthrough the level crossing, unless thedriver has a reasonable excuse. Maximumpenalty—80 penalty units. (3) In thissection— damage , to railinfrastructure, means damage that hinders or prevents thenormal operation or use of the rail infrastructure.railway crossingmeans alevel crossing,bridge oranother structure usedto cross over or under a railway. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 299
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s301] rail infrastructure means thefollowing— (a) a warning bell, warning light, gate,boom or barrier; (b) rail transportinfrastructure withinthe meaning ofthe Transport Infrastructure Act1994 . Division 2 Rules for peoplein charge of animals 301Leading an animal while in or on avehicle (1) The driverof a motorvehicle mustnot lead ananimal, including bytethering the animal to the motor vehicle. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (2) A person who isa passenger in, or on any part of, a motor vehiclemust notlead ananimal whilethe motor vehicleis moving. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) The rider of abicycle must not lead an animal, including by tethering theanimal to the bicycle. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (4) The rider of an animal must not leadmore than 1 other animal on a road, unless the rider holds apermit issued by a local government. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. 301A Harnessing ananimal drawing a vehicle The driver of a vehicle drawn by ananimal must ensure the animal is harnessed in a way thatenables the driver to— (a) control theanimal; and (b) regulate its speed.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.Page300 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 18Miscellaneous road rules [s 301B] 301BRiding an animal on a road-related area whenpossible (1) A person must not ride or lead ananimal on a road if it is practicable to ride or lead the animalon a road-related area. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (2) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes anyshoulder of the road. 302Riderof an animal on a footpath or nature strip to givewayto pedestrians The rider of an animal must give way to anypedestrian on a footpath or nature strip.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.303 Riding an animal alongside more than 1other rider (1) The rider of an animal must not rideon a road alongside more than 1other rider,unless therider isovertaking theother riders ordroving stock. Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) If the rider of an animal is riding ona road alongside another rider, the rider must ride not over1.5m from the other rider. Maximum penalty—20 penaltyunits. (3) In this section— roaddoes notinclude aroad-related area,but includes abicycle path, shared path and any shoulderof the road. 303A Giving way to restive horses(1) This section applies if a person incharge of a restive horse gives a signal, by raising a hand andpointing to the horse, to the driver of a motor vehicle on aroad. (2) The driver must— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 301
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 18 Miscellaneous road rules[s303B] (a) drive the vehicle as near aspracticable to the far left side of the road;and (b) stop the vehicle’s engine; and(c) not movethe vehicle untilthere isno reasonable likelihood thatthe noise of the motor, or the movement ofthe vehicle, willaggravate therestiveness ofthe horse. Maximumpenalty—20 penalty units. (3) In thissection— in charge of includesleading, driving or riding. Division2A Rules for people in charge ofanimal-drawn vehicles 303BBrakes (1)A person incharge ofan animal drawinga vehicle mustensure thatthe vehicle hasan efficient brakecapable ofstopping and holding the vehicle.Maximum penalty—20 penalty units.(2) For a2-wheeled vehicle,subsection (1)is satisfied ifthe vehicle is attached to the animal by aharness that is suitable and sufficient to enable the vehicleto be stopped. (3) If the vehicle is a van, lorry, wagon,or other heavy animal drawn vehicle, subsection (1) is notsatisfied if the vehicle is equipped onlywith a nave brake. Division 3 Obeyingdirections 304 Direction by police officer or trafficcontroller (1) It is a defence to the prosecution ofa person for an offence against aprovision ofthis regulation if,at the timeof the Page 302Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 19Exemptions [s 305] offence,the person wasobeying adirection givento the person—(a) by apolice officerunder thePolice Powersand Responsibilities Act 2000,section 59; or (b) by atraffic controller carryingout the functionsof a trafficcontroller under the Transport Operations (RoadUseManagement—Accreditation and Other Provisions) Regulation2005 , section 26. (2)Inthis section— traffic controller means a personwho holds an appointment under theTransport Operations (RoadUse Management—Accreditationand Other Provisions) Regulation 2005, part 2 asan accredited personwith thefunction of a traffic controller.Part19 Exemptions 305Exemption for drivers of policevehicles (1) A provision of this regulation doesnot apply to the driver of a police vehicleif— (a) in the circumstances—(i) the driver is taking reasonable care;and (ii) it is reasonablethat the provision should not apply; and(b) if thevehicle isa motor vehiclethat ismoving—the vehicleis displaying ablue orred flashing lightor sounding an alarm. (2)Subsection (1)(b)does notapply tothe driver if,in the circumstances,it is reasonable— (a) not to display the light or sound thealarm; or Current as at 7 April 2014Page303
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 19 Exemptions [s 306](b) for the vehicle not to be fitted orequipped with a blue or red flashing light or an alarm.306 Exemptions for drivers of emergencyvehicles A provision of this regulation does notapply to the driver of an emergency vehicle if—(a) in the circumstances—(i) the driver is taking reasonable care;and (ii) it is reasonablethat the provision should not apply; and(b) if thevehicle isa motor vehiclethat ismoving—the vehicle isdisplaying a red flashing light or sounding an alarm.307 Stopping and parking exemption forpolice and emergency vehicles A provision ofpart 12 does not apply to the driver of a policevehicle or emergency vehicle if, in thecircumstances— (a) the driver is taking reasonable care;and (b) it is reasonable that the provisionshould not apply. 308 Exemption for police officers andemergency workers on foot A provision ofpart 14 does not apply to a police officer or emergencyworker onfoot andacting inthe course ofthe police officer’sor emergency worker’sduty if,in the circumstances— (a)the police officeror emergency workeris taking reasonable care;and (b) it is reasonable that the provisionshould not apply. Page 304 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 19Exemptions [s 308A] 308AExemption for police officers using personalmobility devices Sections244E, 244Gand 244O donot apply toa police officerusing apersonal mobilitydevice andacting inthe course of the police officer’s dutyif, in the circumstances— (a) the policeofficer is taking reasonable care; and (b)itis reasonable that the sections should not apply.309 Exemptions for drivers of tramsetc. The following provisions do not apply to thedriver of a tram, the driver of a tram recovery vehicleengaged in accessing or recovering a disabled tram, or thedriver of a bus travelling along tram tracks— •part4 (Making turns), division 1 (Left turns) •section 88 (Left turn signs)• section 89 (Right turn signs)• section 90 (No turns signs)• section 91 (No left turn and no rightturn signs) • section 92 (Traffic lanearrows) • section 99 (Keep left and keep rightsigns) • section 100 (No entry signs)• part 9 (Roundabouts)• part 11(Keeping left,overtaking andother drivingrules), divisions 2 (Keeping to the left), 3(Overtaking), and 7 (Passing trams and safetyzones) • part 12 (Restrictions on stopping andparking). 310 Exemption for road workers etc.(1) A provision mentioned in subsection(2) does not apply to a person atthe site of,and engaged in,roadworks if,in the circumstances— Current as at 7April 2014 Page 305
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 19 Exemptions [s 310](a) it is not practicable for the personto comply with the provision; and (b)sufficient warning of the roadworks has beengiven to other road users. (2)Subsection (1) applies to the followingprovisions— • part 4(Making turns),divisions 1(Left turns)and 2 (Rightturns) • part 7 (Giving way), except—— section 67 (Stopping and giving way ata stop sign or stop line at an intersection withouttraffic lights) — section 68 (Stopping and giving way ata stop sign or stop line at other places)— section 69 (Giving way at a give waysign or give way line atan intersection, otherthan aroundabout) —section 70(Giving wayat a giveway sign ata bridge or length of narrowroad) — section 71 (Giving way at a give waysign or give way line at other places)• part 8 (Traffic signs and roadmarkings), except— — section 102 (Clearance and lowclearance signs) — section 103 (Load limit signs)• part 11(Keeping left,overtaking andother drivingrules) •part12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking) •section 224 (Using horns and similar warningdevices) • part 14(Rules forpedestrians), exceptsection 236(1)(which is about causing a traffic hazard bymoving into the path of an approaching vehicle)• section 264 (Wearing of seatbelts bydrivers) Page 306 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 19Exemptions [s 310] •section 265(Wearing ofseatbelts bypassengers 16years old or older) •section 268 (How persons must travel in oron a motor vehicle) •section 288 (Driving on a path)• section 289 (Driving on a naturestrip) • section 290 (Driving on a trafficisland) • section 295 (Motor vehicle towinganother vehicle with a towline) •section 296 (Driving a vehicle inreverse) • section 297(2) (which requires adriver to have a clear view of the surrounding road andtraffic) • section 298 (Driving with a person ina trailer). (3) Section 20 does not apply to a driverdriving a snow-clearing vehicle and engaged in snowclearing. Editor’s note —section 20 (Obeying the speed limit)(4) In this section— road transportinfrastructure has the meaning given by theTransport Infrastructure Act 1994. roadworks means—(a) construction or maintenance of a roador road transport infrastructure; or (b)roadcleaning; or (c) installation ormaintenance ofa traffic controldevice, traffic-relateditem or traffic monitoring device; or (d)aroad surface survey test. Current as at 7 April 2014Page307
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 19 Exemptions [s 311]311 Exemption for oversize vehicles(1) A provision mentioned in subsection(2) does not apply to the driver ofan oversize vehicle,or the driverof a vehicleescorting or piloting an oversize vehicle,if— (a) it isnot practicable forthe driver tocomply withthe provision; and (b)thedriver is taking reasonable care; and (c)thedriver is complying with— (i) any guideline orpermit applying to the movement ofthe vehicle underthe Standards andSafety Regulation;or (ii) any mass ordimension exemption applying to the movement of thevehicle under the Heavy Vehicle National Law(Queensland); and (d) the vehicle is displaying an oversizewarning sign. (2) For subsection (1), the provisions areas follows— • part 7 (Giving way), except—— section 67 (Stopping and giving way ata stop sign or stop line at an intersection withouttraffic lights) — section 68 (Stopping and giving way ata stop sign or stop line at other places)— section 69 (Giving way at a give waysign or give way line atan intersection, otherthan aroundabout) —section 70(Giving wayat a giveway sign ata bridge or length of narrowroad) — section 71 (Giving way at a give waysign or give way line at other places)• part 8 (Traffic signs and roadmarkings), except— — section 102 (Clearance and lowclearance signs) — section 103 (Load limit signs)Page308 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 19Exemptions [s 312] •section 111(3)(which isabout enteringa roundabout from the rightmarked lane or line of traffic) •section 116 (Obeying traffic lane arrowswhen driving in or leaving a roundabout) •part 11(Keeping left,overtaking andother drivingrules) •part12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking) •section 268 (How persons must travel in oron a motor vehicle) •section 288 (Driving on a path)• section 289 (Driving on a naturestrip) • section 290 (Driving on a trafficisland) • section 296 (Driving a vehicle inreverse) • section 297(2) (which requires adriver to have a clear view of the surrounding road andtraffic). 312 Exemption for tow truck drivers(1) It is a defence to the prosecution ofthe driver of a tow truck for an offence against a provisionmentioned in subsection (2) if, at the timeof the offence— (a) the driveris engaged inloading, orconnecting to,a vehicle to which this section applies;and (b) the driver is unable to comply withthe provision; and (c) the tow truck is displaying a flashinglight; and (d) the driver is acting safely.(2) For subsection (1), the provisions areas follows— • part 4 (Making turns)• part 6 (Traffic lights, traffic arrowsand twin red lights) • part 7 (Givingway), division 1 (Giving way at a stop sign, stop line,give way sign or give way line applying to thedriver) Current as at 7 April 2014Page309
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 19 Exemptions [s 313]• part 8 (Traffic signs and roadmarkings) • part 9 (Roundabouts)• part 11(Keeping left,overtaking andother drivingrules) •part12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking) •section 288 (Driving on a path)• section 289 (Driving on a naturestrip) • section 290 (Driving on a trafficisland). (3) This section applies to the followingvehicles— (a) a vehicle at the scene of acrash; (b) a disabled vehicle;(c) a vehicle unsafely or unlawfullyparked that the driver is authorised totow away underthe Act orthe Heavy Vehicle NationalLaw (Queensland). 313 Exemption for postal vehicles(1) A provision mentioned in subsection(2) does not apply to the driver of a postal vehicle.(2) Subsection (1) applies to thefollowing provisions— • section 179(Stopping in a loading zone) •section 180 (Stopping in a truckzone) • section 182 (Stopping in a taxizone) • section 185 (Stopping in a permitzone) • section 186 (Stopping in a mailzone) • section 189 (Double parking)• section 198 (Obstructing access to andfrom a footpath, driveway etc.). (3)Sections 288 and 289 do not apply to thedriver of a postal vehicle if— Page 310Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 19Exemptions [s 313A] (a)thepostal vehicle is a motorbike with an engine capacityof125mL or less; and (b) the driver is driving the motorbike ata speed of 10km/h or less; and (c)thedriver drives in a way that does not cause danger to,or obstruct, anyoneor anything onthe path ornature strip;and (d) the driver takes reasonableprecautions to avoid crashing with anyone oranything on the path or nature strip. Editor’snote — sections 288 (Driving on a path) and289 (Driving on a nature strip) 313AExemption for garbage truck driversetc. (1) A provision mentioned in subsection(2) does not apply to the driver of a garbage truck, a wastedisposal truck or a vehicle designed forcollecting goods for recycling if— (a)thedriver is engaged in the collection of garbage, wasteorgoods for recycling; and (b) itis not practicable forthe driver tocomply withthe provision; and (c)thetruck or vehicle is displaying a flashing light; and(d) the driver is acting safely.(2) For subsection (1), the provisions areas follows— • section 98 (One-way signs)• section 99 (Keep left and keep rightsigns) • section 100 (No entry signs)• part 12 (Restrictions on stopping andparking), except— — section 175 (Stopping on or near alevel crossing) — section 177 (Stopping on afreeway) — section 178(Stopping inan emergency stoppinglane) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 311
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 19 Exemptions [s 313B]— section 192(Stopping ona bridge orin a tunneletc.) —section 196 (Stopping at or near a tramstop) — section 197(Stopping ona path, dividingstrip, nature strip orpainted island) • section 228 (No pedestriansigns) • section 230 (Crossing aroad—general) • section 234 (Crossing a road on ornear a crossing for pedestrians) •section 238 (Pedestrians travelling along aroad (except in or on a wheeled recreational device ortoy)). 313B Exemption for breakdownvehicles (1) A provision mentioned in subsection(2) does not apply to the driver of a breakdown vehiclewhile— (a) the driver is engaged in repairing adisabled vehicle or is assisting a person to gain access to alocked vehicle; and (b) the driver is unable to comply withthe provision; and (c) the breakdown vehicle is displaying aflashing light; and (d) the driver is acting safely.(2) For subsection (1), the provisions areas follows— • section 137 (Keeping off a dividingstrip) • section 138 (Keeping off a paintedisland) • section 147(Moving from1 marked laneto another markedlane acrossa continuous lineseparating thelanes) •section 197 (Stopping on a path, dividingstrip, nature strip or painted island) •section 288(1) (Driving on a path)• section 289 (Driving on a naturestrip) Page 312 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 314]• section 290 (Driving on a trafficisland). (3) In this section— breakdownvehicle means any vehicle driven by a personwho is— (a) a breakdownworker; and (b) driving the vehicle in the course ofperforming duties as a breakdown worker.breakdown workermeans aperson whoattends disabledvehicles as part of the person’s employmentfor the purpose of repairing the disabled vehicle.Part20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items Division 1General 314Diagrams of traffic control devices,traffic-related items and symbols (1)A diagram inthis regulation ofa traffic controldevice, traffic-related item,or symbol represents alikeness ofthe device, item or symbol.(2) If there are 2 or more diagrams of atraffic sign in schedules 2 and 3 or of atraffic-related item or symbol in schedule 4, eachdiagram represents alikeness ofa permitted versionof the sign, item orsymbol. (3) If adiagram ofa traffic signin schedule 2or 3 orof a traffic-related itemor symbol in schedule4 is inblack andwhite, the permitted version of the sign,item or symbol is in black and white only.(4) If a diagram of a traffic sign,traffic-related item or symbol in a section ofthis regulation is in black and white and the sign,Current as at 7 April 2014Page313
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 315] item or symbolis not in black and white only in schedule 2, 3 or 4, thediagram is a black and white representation of thesign, item or symbol and is not a permittedversion of the sign, item or symbol. 315Legaleffect of traffic control devices (1)Atraffic control device of a kind mentioned in thisregulation has effect for this regulation if—(a) the device is on a road; and(b) the device complies substantially withthis regulation. (2) A traffic control device is taken tocomply substantially with this regulation unless the contrary isproved. 316 When do traffic control devices complysubstantially with this regulation (1)Atraffic sign complies substantially with this regulation if—(a) it is a reasonable likeness of adiagram in schedule 2 or 3 of that kind of traffic sign;or (b) for atraffic signof a kindfor which thereis not adiagram inschedule 2or 3—it compliessubstantially witha description ofthat kindof traffic signin this regulation and,if the description includes a symbol for which there is adiagram in schedule 4, the symbol on the sign is areasonable likeness of the diagram. (2)Aroad marking complies substantially with this regulation ifit complies substantially witha description ofthat kindof road marking in this regulation and,if the description includes asymbol forwhich thereis a diagramin schedule 4,the symbol inthe road markingis a reasonable likenessof the diagram.(3) A trafficcontrol device(except atraffic signor a roadmarking) compliessubstantially withthis regulation ifthe device complies substantially with adescription of that kind of trafficcontrol devicein this regulation and,if the Page 314Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 316]description includes a symbol for whichthere is a diagram in schedule 4, the symbol on the deviceis a reasonable likeness of the diagram. (4)Atraffic sign may be a reasonable likeness of a diagram of akind oftraffic signmentioned inthis regulation eventhough— (a)thedimensions of the sign, or of anything on the sign,aredifferent; or (b) the sign has additional information onor with it; or (c) the number on the sign is different;or (d) the sign has a different number ofpanels; or (e) the sign is combined on a single panelwith 1 or more other traffic signs; or (f)fora parking control sign—words, figures, symbols, oranything else, on the sign are differentlyarranged; or (g) for a bus lane sign, emergencystopping lane only sign, one-way sign or parking controlsign—the sign has an arrow pointing in a differentdirection; or (h) for aseparated footpathsign oran end separatedfootpath sign—the pedestrian and bicyclesymbols are reversed; or (i)fora road access sign—information on or with the signindicates (whetherby different wordingor in anotherway)that it applies to different or additional vehicles orpersons; or (j)there isa variation inshade orbrightness betweena colour onthe sign andthe equivalent colourin the diagram.Example for subsection (4)(b)— A speed limit sign near a school maysay that the sign has effect at certaintimes. Thisadditional information doesnot prevent thesign being a reasonable likeness of thediagram of a speed limit sign in schedule2. Current as at 7 April 2014Page315
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 316] Example forsubsection (4)(c) — The diagram of the area speed limitsign in schedule 2 has the number ‘60’. Aparticular area speed limit sign may have another number,for example, ‘50’. The different number on thesign does not prevent the sign being a reasonable likeness ofthe diagram. Examples for subsection (4)(d)— 1 A school zonesign may have the indicated speed limit, the words‘school zone’, and the times of operation,on a single panel or separate panels. 2Anend bicycle path sign may have the word ‘end’ on a separatepanelor on the same panel as the rest of the sign. Example forsubsection (4)(e) — A no parking sign that operates atcertain times may be combined on a single panel witha permissive parking sign allowing pay parking atothertimes. Example for subsection (4)(f)— A permissive parking sign limitingparking to 2 hours may have the time limit above, orbelow, the word ‘parking’. Example for subsection (4)(i)— The diagram of the road access sign inschedule 2 says ‘no pedestrians bicyclesanimals beyondthis point’. Thereplacement ofthe word ‘bicycles’ by theword ‘tractors’ on a particular sign does not prevent thesignbeing a reasonable likeness of the diagram. (5)Avariable illuminated message sign may also be a reasonablelikeness of a diagram of a kind of trafficsign in schedule 2 or 3 even though the colour of the sign,or of anything else on the sign, is different.Page316 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 317]Example of standard sign and variableilluminated message sign — Speed limit sign(Standard sign) Speed limit sign (Variableilluminated message sign) (6)Asymbol on or in a traffic control device may be a reasonablelikeness of a diagram of a kind of symbolmentioned in this regulation even though the dimensions of thesymbol, or of anything on the symbol, aredifferent. (7) In this section— panelincludes a board, plate and screen.317 Information on or with traffic controldevices (1) A trafficcontrol devicemay, bythe use ofwords, figures,symbols or anything else indicate any of thefollowing— (a) the times, days or circumstances whenit applies or does not apply; (b)thelengths of road or areas where it applies or does notapply; (c)thepersons to whom it applies or does not apply; (d)thevehicles to which it applies or does not apply; (e)other information. Examples ofcircumstances — 1 A speed limitsign may indicate that it applies when the lights at achildren’s crossing are flashing.2 A speed limit sign may indicate thatit applies when children are present.Current as at 7 April 2014Page317
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 318] (2)Inthis section— traffic control device includes aboard, device, plate, screen, word, figure,symbol, or anything else, with a traffic controldevice that provides information about theapplication of the traffic control device. Examples ofinformation with a traffic control device —• a plate erected immediately below a noU-turn sign indicating that the sign applies on Monday to Fridaybetween 8a.m. and 6p.m. • an illuminatedboard erected close to, but not next to, a no entrysignindicating that commercial trucks are permitted to pass thesignwhen the words on the board are illuminated 318Limited effect of certain traffic controldevices (1) If information ona traffic controldevice indicatesthat thedevice applies during particular times, onparticular days, in particular circumstances, to a particularlength of road or area, or to particular persons or vehicles,the device has effect only for the indicated times, days,circumstances, length of road, area, persons orvehicles. Example —ashared zone sign on a road into an area indicating that the signapplies on Monday to Friday between 7a.m. and6p.m. (2) If information ona traffic controldevice indicatesthat thedevice doesnot apply duringparticular times,on particular days, inparticular circumstances, to a particular length of roadorarea, or to particular persons or vehicles, the device doesnothave effect for the indicated times, days, circumstances,length of road, area, persons orvehicles. Examples —• a plateerected nextto a pedestriancrossing signat a placeindicating that the sign does not apply on aparticular day • a boarderected closeto a buslane sign abovea marked laneindicating that the sign does not apply whenthe words on the board are illuminated (3)If information ona traffic controldevice thatis at aplace indicates thatit applies on a particular day of the week, the Page 318Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 319]device does not have effect on a day that isa public holiday for the placeunless information onthe device statesotherwise. Example— If a loading zone sign indicates thatit applies on Monday to Friday between 9a.m. and4p.m. and information on or with the sign does notindicate that it applies on public holidays,the sign does not have effect on any publicholiday falling on a Monday to Friday. (4)Inthis section— traffic control device includes aboard, device, plate, screen, word, figure,symbol, or anything else, with a traffic controldevice that provides information about theapplication of the traffic control device. 319Legaleffect of traffic-related items mentioned in thisregulation (1)Atraffic-related item of a kind mentioned in this regulationhaseffect for this regulation if— (a)theitem is on a road or on a vehicle on a road; and(b) the item complies substantially withthis regulation. (2) A traffic-related item is taken tocomply with this regulation unless thecontrary is proved. 320 When do traffic-related items complysubstantially with this regulation (1)A traffic-related itemcomplies substantially withthis regulationif— (a) it is a reasonable likeness of adiagram in schedule 4 of that kind of traffic-related item;or (b) for a traffic-related item of a kindfor which there is not a diagram in schedule 4—(i) it complies substantially with adescription of that kind of traffic-related item in thisregulation; and Current as at 7 April 2014Page319
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 321] (ii)ifthe description includes a symbol for which thereis adiagram in schedule 4, the symbol on the item is a reasonablelikeness of the diagram. (2) Atraffic-related itemmay be areasonable likenessof a diagramof a kindof traffic-related itemmentioned inthis regulation eventhough— (a) the dimensions of the item or ofanything on the item are different; or (b)theitem has additional information. (3)A symbol ona traffic-related itemmay be areasonable likeness of adiagram of a kind of symbol mentioned in this regulation eventhough thedimensions ofthe symbol orof anything on the symbol aredifferent. 321 Meaning of information on or withtraffic control devices and traffic-related itemsA word, figure,symbol oranything elseused onor with atraffic controldevice ortraffic-related itemhas the samemeaning as in this regulation.322 Reference to traffic control devicesand traffic-related items on a road etc. (1)Atraffic control device or traffic-related item above or neara road is taken to be on the road.Examples —1 A speed limit sign erected on a postat the side of a road is taken to be a speed limitsign on the road. 2 A traffic lane arrow on a structureimmediately above the road is taken to be atraffic lane arrow on the road. 3A donot overtake turning vehicle sign attached to a vehicle on aroadis taken to be a do not overtake turning vehicle sign on theroad. (2)However, the device or item is taken to beon the road only if it is clearlyvisible toroad usersto whom itis designed toapply. Page 320Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 322]Example —Ashared zone sign erected on a post near the side of a road is atraffic sign on the road only if it is clearlyvisible to drivers driving on the road during the dayand in normal weather conditions. (3)Atraffic control device or traffic-related item above or nearanarea or place is taken to be in or at the area or place.Examples —1 Traffic lights erected outside thearea of an intersection, but near that area, aretaken to be traffic lights at the intersection. 2Ahook turn only sign fixed to a structure above a road that isclose to, but before, an intersection is taken tobe a hook turn only sign at the intersection. 3Aparking control sign near the side of a road is taken to be atthe side of the road. 4Aparking control sign near the centre of a road is taken to be atthe centre of the road. (4)However, the device or item is taken to bein or at the area or place only if it is clearly visible toroad users to whom it is designed to apply. Example— A no right turn sign suspended fromwires above a road close to, but before, anintersection is a traffic sign at the intersection only if itis clearly visible to drivers approaching theintersection during the day and in normal weatherconditions. (5) Without limitingsubsection (3),a traffic controldevice ortraffic-related item above or near a breakin a dividing strip is taken to be at the break.Example —A noU-turn sign erected in a dividing strip close to, but before, abreak in the dividing strip is taken to be at thebreak. (6) However, the device or item is takento be at the break only if it isclearly visibleto road usersto whom itis designed toapply. (7)A traffic controldevice ortraffic-related itemis taken tocomply with subsection (2), (4) or (6)unless the contrary is proved. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 321
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 323] (8)Inthis section— clearly visible means—(a) for a traffic signal—clearly visibleduring the day and night in normal weather conditions;or (b) for anothertraffic controldevice ora traffic-related item—clearlyvisible during the day in normal weather conditions. daymeans the period between sunrise on a dayand sunset on the same day. normal weatherconditions means weather conditions that arenothazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility.323 References to lights that are trafficsignals A reference in this regulation to a lightthat is, or is part of, traffic signals is a reference to asteady light, unless otherwise expresslystated. 323A Audible lines (1)Anaudible line is a line on a road that is made up of a seriesofclosely spaced raised pieces of material designed to createa continuous noise or vibration if driven onby a motor vehicle. (2) A reference in this regulation to aline is to be taken to include areference toan audible line,unless otherwiseexpressly stated.(3) For the purposes of thisregulation— (a) an audible line is taken to becontinuous even if there is no physical linkbetween the pieces of material making up the line;and (b) if thereis no physicallink betweenthose pieces,the colour ofthe audible lineis taken tobe the visiblecolour of those pieces. Page 322Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 324]Division 2 Application oftraffic control devices to lengths of roads andareas 324Purpose of division (1)This divisioncontains rulesexplaining whentraffic controldevices apply to lengths of road andareas. (2) Other relevant rules are foundelsewhere in this regulation. 325References to traffic controldevices—application to lengths of road and areasIn applying thisregulation toa length ofroad oran area, unless thecontrary intention appears, a reference to a trafficcontrol deviceis a referenceto a trafficcontrol deviceapplying to the length of road orarea. 326 When do traffic control devices applyto a length of road or area—the basic rules (1)Atraffic control device applies to a length of road or anarea if— (a) the deviceapplies to the length of road or area under 1 or moreprovisions of this regulation; or (b)thedevice, the position of the device, or information onorwith the device indicates that the device applies to thelength of road or area. (2)Atraffic control device does not apply to a length of road oran area ifinformation onor with thedevice expresslyindicates that it does not apply to thelength of road or area. (3) Subsection (2)applies despiteany other provisionof this division.(4) In subsection (1)(b)—thedevice includes another traffic controldevice. Current as at 7 April 2014Page323
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 327] 327Length of road to which a traffic sign(except a parking control sign) applies The length ofroad to which a traffic sign on a road (except aparking controlsign) appliesis worked outin the directiondriven by a driver, or travelled by apedestrian, on the road who faces the sign before passingit. Example —Section 21(2) provides that a speed limitsign applies to the length of road beginning atthe sign and ending at the nearest of a different speedlimitsign, an end speed limit sign or speed derestriction sign, or theend of the road. Only the nearest of thosethings, in the direction driven by a driver, ortravelled by a pedestrian, who faces the sign before passingit, is relevant. 328References to a traffic control deviceapplying to a length of road If,under thisregulation, atraffic controldevice ona road applies to alength of road, the device applies only to a lengthofroad on that road, unless otherwise expressly stated.Example —Aspeed limit sign on a road does not apply to roads leading off fromthe road. 329Traffic control devices applying to a markedlane (1) A traffic control device (except aroad marking) applies to a marked lane if— (a)itis above the marked lane; or (b)itis near the marked lane and the device, the position ofthe device, orinformation onor with thedevice indicates thatit applies to the marked lane. Example— An emergencystopping laneonly sign appliesto the markedlane indicated by the arrow on thesign. (2) A road marking applies to a markedlane if it is on the surface of thelane. Page 324 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 330](3) However, a traffic control device doesnot apply to a marked lane if information on or with thedevice expressly indicates that the device does not apply to themarked lane. (4) In subsection (1)(b)—thedevice includes another traffic controldevice. 330 Traffic control devices applying to aslip lane (1) A traffic control device (except aroad marking) applies to a slip lane if— (a)itis above the slip lane; or (b) it is near theslip lane and on the left side of the slip lane;or (c) it is near theslip lane and the device, the position of the device,or information onor with thedevice indicatesthatit applies to the slip lane. (2)Aroad marking applies to a slip lane if it is on the surfaceof the slip lane. (3)However, a traffic control device does notapply to a slip lane if information on or with the deviceexpressly indicates that the device does not apply to the sliplane. (4) In subsection (1)(c)—thedevice includes another traffic controldevice. 331 Traffic control devices applying to anintersection A traffic control device—(a) applies to an intersection if it is atthe intersection; and (b) does not applyto a slip lane at the intersection, unless information onor with thedevice expresslyindicates that the devicedoes not apply to the intersection. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 325
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 332] 332Parking control signs applying to a lengthof road (1) If a parking control sign displays anarrow and is at the side of a road, then,unless information on or with the sign indicatesotherwise, the sign applies to the length ofroad between the sign and the nearest (in the directionindicated by the arrow) of the following— (a)a parking controlsign atthat sideof the roadthat displays anarrow indicating the opposite direction; (b)ayellow edge line on the road; (c)ifthe road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the endofthe road. (2) If a parking control sign displays anarrow and is at the centre of a road or on a dividing strip,then, unless information on or withthe sign indicatesotherwise, thesign appliesto the lengthof road betweenthe sign andthe nearest (inthe direction indicated by the arrow) ofthe following— (a) a parkingcontrol signat that sideof the roadthat displays anarrow indicating the opposite direction; (b)ayellow edge line on the road; (c)ifthe road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the endofthe road. 333 Parking control signs applying to alength of road in an area to which another parking control signapplies etc. (1) If a parking control sign applying toa length of road is in an area towhich anotherparking controlsign appliesin accordance withsection 335,the first parkingcontrol signapplies in the same way as it would apply ifit were not in that area, and the second parking control signdoes not apply to the length of road. Example— Parking control signs that establish aloading zone or taxi zone may operateon a lengthof road inan area whereparking isotherwise restricted toresidents only by other parking control signs on each roadintothe area. Page 326 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 334](2) If the area indicated by a people withdisabilities road marking is inan area towhich aparking controlsign appliesin accordance with section 335, the roadmarking applies in the same way as it would apply if it werenot in that area, and the parking control sign does not apply tothe area indicated by the road marking. 334Howparking control signs apply to a length of road (1)If apermissive parking sign, bicycle parking sign, motorbikeparking sign, or a parking control sign fora zone mentioned in part 12, division 5, applies to a length ofroad and there are parking bays on the length of road, the signapplies only to the parking bays, unless information on or withthe sign indicates otherwise. (2)If aparking control sign applies to a length of road, the signis at the side of the road, and there are noparking bays to which the sign applies, then, unlessinformation on or with the sign indicatesotherwise, the sign applies to— (a)anyshoulder of the road on that side of the road; and(b) the part of the road on the length ofroad extending from the far side of the road (excluding anyroad-related area) on that side of the road for—(i) if thesign, orinformation onor with thesign, includesthe words ‘angleparking’ or‘angle’—6 metres;or (ii) in any othercase—3 metres. Current as at 7 April 2014Page327
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 335] Examples— Example 1 Example 2Partof a road to which a parking control Part of a roadto which a parking control sign indicating angle parkingapplies sign (except a sign indicating angleparking) applies (3)If aparking control sign applies to a length of road, the signis at the centre of the road or on a dividingstrip, and there are no parking baysto which thesign applies,then, unlessinformation on or with the sign indicatesotherwise, the sign applies to— (a)if the signis at thecentre ofthe road, butnot on adividing strip—thepart ofthe road onthat lengthof road extending 3m from the centre ofthe road on each side of the road; or (b)ifthe sign is on a dividing strip—the dividing strip onthatlength of road and the part of the road on that lengthof road extending3m from eachedge ofthe dividing strip.335 Traffic control devices applying to anarea (1) A traffic control device (except aroad marking) applies to an area if—(a) it is in the area; andPage328 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 335](b) the device, the position of thedevice, or information on or with the device indicates that thedevice applies to the area. (2)Atraffic control device (except a road marking) also appliestoan area if— (a) there is an identical kind of trafficcontrol device (the first traffic control device) oneach road into the area; and (b)the traffic controldevice isa traffic controldevice applying to anarea, or information on or with the device indicates thatit applies to an area; and (c) information onor with a traffic control device on each road out of thearea indicates that the first traffic control device no longerapplies or that the area has ended. Examples oftraffic control devices applying to an area —• a shared zone sign •a nostopping sign or no parking sign with the word ‘area’• a permissive parking sign with thewords ‘parking area’ • an end no parking area sign• an end no stopping area sign• an end parking area sign(3) A road marking applies to an areaif— (a) it is on the surface of the area;and (b) the road marking, the position of theroad marking, or information in or with the road markingindicates that the road marking applies to the area.(4) However, a traffic control device doesnot apply to an area if information on or with the deviceexpressly indicates that the device does notapply to the area. (5) A parkingcontrol signthat appliesto an areaapplies toparking bays on each length of road in thearea, and to other parts of each length of road, as if it werea parking control sign applying only to that length ofroad. Current as at 7 April 2014Page329
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 336] (6)Inthis section— road , in subsection(2)(a) and (c) and for an area of road, does not include aroad-related area. the device ,in subsection (1)(b),includes anothertraffic controldevice. the road marking, in subsection (3)(b),includes anothertraffic control device. 336Howseparated footpath signs and separated footpath road markingsapply (1) A separatedfootpath sign,or separated footpathroad marking,on a footpathapplies inthe way setout in thissection. (2)Thepart of the footpath to the left of the centre of thefootpath is designated— (a)if apedestrian symbol is on the left side of the sign orthepath—for the use of pedestrians; or (b)if abicycle symbol is on the left side of the sign or thepath—for the use of bicycles.(3) The partof the footpathto the rightof the centreof the footpath isdesignated— (a) if a pedestrian symbol is on the rightside of the sign or the path—for the use of pedestrians;or (b) if a bicycle symbol is on the rightside of the sign or the path—for the use of bicycles.(4) A person using a personal mobilitydevice may use any part of a separatedfootpath, regardless ofwhether thepart isdesignated for the use of pedestrians orbicycles. (5) In this section— pedestrian doesnot include aperson usinga personal mobilitydevice. Page 330 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 337]Division 3 Application oftraffic control devices to persons 337Purpose of division This divisionexplains when a traffic control device applies toaperson. 338 References to traffic controldevices—application to persons Inapplying thisregulation toa person, unlessthe contrary intentionappears, a reference to a traffic control device is areference to a traffic control deviceapplying to the person. 339 When do trafficcontrol devices apply to a person—the basicrules (1) A traffic control device applies to aperson if— (a) the device applies to the person undera provision of this division; or (b)thedevice, the position of the device, or information onorwith the device indicates that the device applies to theperson. (2)A traffic controldevice doesnot apply toa person ifinformation on or with the device expresslyindicates that it does not apply to the person.(3) Subsection (2)applies despiteany other provisionof this division.(4) In subsection (1)(b)—thedevice includes another traffic controldevice. Current as at 7 April 2014Page331
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 340] 340Traffic control devices (except roadmarkings and parking control signs) (1)A traffic controldevice (excepta road markingor parking control sign)applies to a person if— (a) the device facesthe person; or (b) the person has passed the device andthe device faced the person as the person approachedit. (2) However, thedevice doesnot apply tothe person ifthe position of the device indicates thatit does not apply to the person. Examples— 1 If a driver isdriving in a marked lane of a multi-lane road, a trafficlanearrow above another marked lane does not apply to thedriver. 2 If a driver is turning left using aslip lane at an intersection, a traffic light on theright side of the painted island or traffic island thatseparates the slip lane from other parts ofthe road does not apply to the driver. 3If adriver is driving on a two-way road, a speed limit signfacing only traffic travelling in the oppositedirection does not apply to the driver.341 Road markings A road markingon the surface of a road applies to a person on the road unlessthe position of the road marking indicates that it does notapply to the person. Examples —1 If a driver is driving on a road thatis not a multi-lane road or one-way road, a road marking to theright of the centre of the road does not apply tothe driver. 2 If a driver is driving in a markedlane of a multi-lane road, a road marking inanother marked lane does not apply to the driver.3 At an intersection, or on aroundabout, road markings indicating the edge of a markedlane for use by traffic coming from a particulardirection do not apply to a driver comingfrom another direction. Page 332 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Trafficcontrol devices and traffic-related items [s 342]342 Traffic signs (except parking controlsigns) applying to a length of road (1)A traffic sign(except aparking controlsign) applyingto a length of roadand to drivers applies to a driver driving on thelength of road if the driver is driving inthe same direction as a driver on the road who faces the signbefore passing it. (2) A traffic sign applying to a length ofroad and to pedestrians applies to a pedestrian travelling onthe length of road if the pedestrian is travelling in the samedirection as a pedestrian on the road who faces the sign beforepassing it. (3) The traffic sign applies to the driveror pedestrian even though the driver or pedestrian does not passthe sign. Example —If adriver turns from a side road or private land onto a length of roadto which a traffic sign applies, the trafficsign applies to the driver even though the driverdoes not pass the sign. (4) Subsections (1)to (3) donot affect theoperation ofthe Criminal Code, section 24.Editor’s note— Criminal Code,section 24 (Mistake of fact) 343Traffic signs (except parking control signs)applying to an area (1)Atraffic sign (except a parking control sign) applying to anareaand to drivers applies to a driver driving on any road inthearea. (2) A traffic sign applying to an area andto pedestrians applies to a pedestrian on any road in thearea. (3) The traffic sign applies to the driveror pedestrian even though the driver or pedestrian does not passthe sign. Example —Theshared zone signs on the roads into a shared zone apply to adriver who starts a journey inside the sharedzone. Current as at 7 April 2014Page333
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 20 Traffic control devices andtraffic-related items [s 344] (4)Subsections (1)to (3) donot affect theoperation ofthe Criminal Code, section 24.344 Traffic control devices applying to adriver in a marked lane A trafficcontrol device applying to a marked lane applies to adriver approaching, in or leaving the markedlane unless the position of the device indicates that itdoes not apply to the driver. Example— An overhead lane control device abovea marked lane that the driver does not face asthe driver approaches it does not apply to the driver.345 Traffic control devices applying to adriver in a slip lane A trafficcontrol deviceapplying toa slip laneapplies toa driver approaching, in or leaving theslip lane. 346 Parking control signs(1) A parking control sign applying to alength of road applies to a driver on the length of road.(2) A parking control sign applying to anarea applies to a driver in the area. (3)A parking controlsign appliesto a drivermentioned insubsection (1) or (2) even though the driverdoes not pass the sign. (4)Subsections (1)to (3) donot affect theoperation ofthe Criminal Code, section 24.Page334 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 21General [s 347] Part 21General 347Meaning of abbreviations and symbolsSchedule 1 provides the meaning of certainabbreviations and symbols used in this regulation and ontraffic control devices and traffic-related items.348 References to a driver doing somethingetc. If the context permits, a reference in thisregulation to a driver doing ornot doing somethingis a referenceto the drivercausing the driver’s vehicle to do or not todo the thing. Example —Thereference in section 27 to a driver turning left at an intersectionis a reference to the driver causing the driver’svehicle to turn left at the intersection. 349References to certain kinds of roadsAreference in this regulation to a road of a particular kind isa reference to a road of that kind at anyrelevant place. Example —Section 31 deals with a driver starting aright turn at an intersection from a road (except amulti-lane road). The section applies to a particulardriver onlyif the roadfrom which thedriver isturning isnot a multi-lane roadat the intersection. In applying the section to the driver,it isirrelevant that the road is, or is not, a multi-lane road atanother place away from the intersection.350 References to stopping or parking on alength of road etc. (1)Adriver stops or parks on a length of road or in an area ifthe driver stops or parks the driver’s vehicleso any part of the vehicle is on the length of road or in thearea. (2) A driverstops orparks withina particular distancefrom, before,or after, somethingif the driverstops orparks theCurrent as at 7 April 2014Page335
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 21 General [s 351]driver’s vehicleso any partof the vehicleis within thatdistance. Example forsubsection (2) — Section 190 provides that a drivermust not stop on a road within 10m before or after asafety zone. The example diagram in section 190 showsavehicle stopped so part of the vehicle is within 10m of the zone.For section 190, the vehicle is taken to bestopped within 10m of the zone. (3)Adriver stops or parks on or across a driveway or other wayofaccess for vehicles if the driver stops or parks the vehicleso that any part of the vehicle is on or acrossthe driveway or way of access. (4)Inthis section— park has the samemeaning as in part 12. stop has the samemeaning as in part 12. 351 References toleft and right A driver drives to the left, or right, of aline, sign or anything else only if the driver’s vehicle iscompletely to the left, or right, of the line, sign or otherthing. 352 References to stopping as near aspracticable to a place A requirement in this regulation for adriver to stop as near as practicable to a place is not compliedwith only because the driver stops behind a vehicle that hasstopped at the place. Example —If adriver stops behind a vehicle that has stopped at a stop sign orstop line in accordance with section 67, 68 or121, the driver must, after the vehicle hasproceeded, stop at the stop sign or stop line in accordancewiththe section. 352A Giving way to pedestrians crossing aroad (1) This sectionapplies toa driver atan intersection whois required, undera relevant provision, togive wayto a Page 336Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 21General [s 353] pedestrian whois crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver isentering. (2) The driver is required to give way tothe pedestrian only if the pedestrian’s line of travel incrossing the road, or part of the road, the driveris entering is essentially at right angles to theedges of the road, or part of theroad. (3) In this section— relevantprovision means any of the following—(a) section 62(1)(a); (b)section 64(b); (c)section 67(4); (d)section 69(3); (e)section 72(3)(b) or (5)(c);(f) section 73(2)(b), (4) or(6)(b). 353 Prescribed offences for ch 5, pt 7 ofthe Act For chapter 5, part 7 of the Act, offencesagainst the following provisions are prescribedoffences— (a) section 20; (b)section 56(1) and (2); (c)section 104(1), (2) and (3);(d) the TransportOperations (RoadUse Management—Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2010, sections 11 and 127(2)(f);(e) the MotorAccident InsuranceAct 1994 ,section 20(1)and(2). Current as at 7 April 2014Page337
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Part 21 General [s 353A]353A People with disabilities symbols—Act,sch 4, definition people withdisabilities symbol For the Act,schedule 4,definition peoplewith disabilities symbol,the following symbols are prescribed— 353BPower-assisted bicycles—Act, sch 4,definition power-assisted bicycle (1)This sectionprescribes, forthe Act, schedule4, definition power-assistedbicycle , vehicles that are, and vehicles thatare not, power-assisted bicycles.(2) A vehiclementioned inthe Act, schedule4, definition power-assisted bicycle, paragraph (a)(i)is a power-assisted bicycle ifit— (a) is a pedalec; or (b)has1 or more electric motors with a maximum power output,or combined maximumpower output,of not more than 200watts. (3) A vehiclementioned inthe Act, schedule4, definition power-assisted bicycle, paragraph (a)(i)is not apower-assisted bicycle if it has an internalcombustion engine. (4) In this section— pedalechas the meaninggiven bythe Vehicle Standard(Australian Design Rule—Definitions andVehicle Categories) 2005 (Cwlth).Page338 Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Part 22 Repealand transitional provisions [s 354]Part22 Repeal and transitional provisions 354Repeal TheTransport Operations (RoadUse Management—Road Rules)Regulation 1999, SL No. 246 is repealed. 355Continuation of Transport Operations (RoadUse Management—Road Rules) Regulation 1999, s266 Despite therepeal ofthe Transport Operations (RoadUse Management—Road Rules)Regulation 1999,section 266 of that regulation continues in force until theend of 10 March 2010. 356References to Transport Operations (RoadUse Management—Road Rules) Regulation1999 A reference inan Act orother documentto the TransportOperations (Road Use Management—Road Rules)Regulation 1999 is, if thecontext permits, taken to be a reference to thisregulation. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 339
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 1 Schedule 1Abbreviations and symbolssection 347 Abbreviation/Symbol MONTUE WED THUFRI SAT SUNJAN FEB MARAPR JUN JULAUG SEP OCTNOV DEC AM or A.M.PM orP.M. HOLS MAX MINSPUB VEH Page 340Meaning MondayTuesday WednesdayThursday FridaySaturday SundayJanuary FebruaryMarch AprilJune JulyAugust SeptemberOctober NovemberDecember the time aftermidnight and ending at midday the time aftermidday and ending at midnight holidaysmaximum minutespublic vehicleCurrent as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Schedule 2 Standard orcommonly used traffic signs sections 314 and316 Area speed limit sign (section22) Bicycle lane sign (sections 153,252) Bicycle parking sign (section201) Bicycle path sign (sections 239,242, 252) Bridge load limit (gross mass) sign(section 103) Bridge loadlimit (mass per axle group) sign(section 103) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 341
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 Buses must entersign (section 107) Bus lanesign (section 154) Bus zonesign (section 183) Childrencrossing flag (section 80) Children’scrossing sign (section 80) Clearancesign (section 102) Page 342Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Clearway sign (section176) Emergency stopping lane only sign(section 95) End area speedlimit sign (section 22) End bicycle lanesign (section 153) End bicycle pathsign (section 239) End bus lanesign (section 154) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 343
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 End clearwaysign (section 176) End freewaysign (sections 97, 177) End keep leftunless overtaking sign (section 130) End no bicyclessign (section 252) End noovertaking or passing sign (section 93) End no parkingarea sign (section 335) Page 344Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Endno stopping area sign (section 335) End parking areasign (section 335) End road accesssign (section 97) End school zonesign (section 23) End separatedfootpath sign (section 239) End shared pathsign (section 242) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 345
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 End shared zonesign (section 24) End speed limitsign (section 21) End tram lanesign (section 155) End transit lanesign (End transit lane (T2) sign) (section156) End transit lane sign (End transitlane (T3) sign) (section156) End trucks and buses low gear sign(section 108) Page 346Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Endtruck lane sign (section 157) End trucks useleft lane sign (section 159) Freewaysign (section 177) Freewaysign (section 177) Give waysign (sections 69, 70, 71, 122)Gross load limit sign (section103) Hand-held stop sign (section80) Hand-held stop sign (section80) Current as at 7 April 2014Page347
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 Hook turn onlysign (section 34) Keep leftsign (section 99) Keep left unlessovertaking sign (section 130) Keep rightsign (sections 99, 135) Left lane mustturn left sign (section 88) Left turn onlysign (section 88) Page 348Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Leftturn on red after stopping sign (section59) Level crossing sign (section120) Level crossing sign (section120) Level crossing sign (section120) Loading zone sign (section179) Low clearance sign (section102) Current as at 7 April 2014Page349
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 Mail zonesign (section 186) Median turninglane sign (section 86) Motorbikeparking sign (section 202) No bicyclessign (sections 239, 242, 252) No busessign (section 106) No entrysign (section 100) No hook turn bybicycles sign (section 36) No left turnsign (Standard sign) (section 91) Page 350Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Noleft turn sign (Variable illuminated messagesign) (section 91) No overtaking onbridge sign (section 94) No overtaking orpassing sign (section 93) No parking sign(for a length of road) (section 168) No parking sign(for an area) (section 168) No pedestrianssign (section 228) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 351
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 No right turnsign (Standard sign) (section 91) No right turnsign (Variable illuminated message sign) (section91) No stopping sign (for a length ofroad) (section 167) No stopping sign(for an area) (section 167) No truckssign (section 104) No turnssign (section 90) Page 352Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2NoU-turn sign (Standard sign) (section39) No U-turn sign (Variable illuminatedmessage sign) (section39) One-way sign (section98) One-way sign (section98) Park in bays only sign (section211) Pedestrian crossing sign (section81) Pedestrians may cross diagonally signPeople with disabilities parking sign(sections 230, 234) (section203) Current as at 7 April 2014Page353
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 Permissiveparking sign (for a length of Permissiveparking sign (for a length of road)road) (section204) (section 204) Permissiveparking sign (for an area) (section 204) Permissiveparking sign displaying a people with disabilities symbol (fora length of road) (section203) Permissive parking sign displaying apeople with disabilities symbol (foran area) (section203) Permit zone sign (section185) Page 354 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Right lane must turn right sign(section 89) Right turn onlysign (section 89) Road accesssign (sections 97, 229) Roundaboutsign (section 109) Safety zonesign (sections 162, 190) Separatedfootpath sign (sections 239, 252) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 355
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 School zonesign (section 23) Shared pathsign (sections 242, 252) Shared zonesign (section 24) Slow vehicleturn out lane sign (section 130) Speedderestriction sign (section 21) Speed limit sign(Standard sign) (sections 21, 316) Page 356Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Speedlimit sign (Variable illuminated messagesign) (sections 21, 316) Stop here on redarrow sign (section 56) Stop here on redsignal sign (section 56) Stop sign(sections 67, 68, 121) Taxi zonesign (section 182) Trafficlight-stop sign (section 63) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 357
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2 Tram lanesign (section 155) Transit lanesign (Transit lane (T2) sign) (section156) Transit lane sign (Transit lane (T3)sign) (section 156) Truck lanesign (section 157) Trucks and buseslow gear sign (section 108) Trucks mustenter sign (section 105) Page 358Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 2Trucks use left lane sign(section 159) Truck zonesign (section 180) Two-waysign (sections 98, 132, 136) U-turn permittedsign (section 40) Works zonesign (section 181) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 359
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 Schedule 3Other permitted traffic signssections 314 and 316 Area speed limitsign (section 22) Area speed limitsign (section 22) Area speed limitsign (section 22) Bicycle lanesign (sections 153, 252) Bicycle lanesign (sections 153, 252) Bicycle pathsign (sections 239, 242, 252) Page 360Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Bicycle path sign (sections 239,242, 252) Bridge load limit (mass per axlegroup sign) (section103) Bridge load limit (mass per axle groupsign) (section103) Buses must enter sign (section107) Bus lane sign (section154) Bus lane sign (section154) Current as at 7 April 2014Page361
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 Bus lanesign (section 154) Bus lanesign (section 154) Bus lanesign (section 154) Bus lanesign (section 154) Bus lanesign (section 154) Bus lanesign (section 154) Page 362Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Buslane sign (section 154) Bus zonesign (section 183) Bus zonesign (section 183) Children’scrossing sign (section 80) End area speedlimit sign (section 22) End area speedlimit sign (section 22) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 363
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 End area speedlimit sign (section 22) End bicycle lanesign (section 153) End bicycle pathsign (section 239) End bicycle pathsign (section 239) End bus lanesign (section 154) End bus lanesign (section 154) Page 364Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Endbus lane sign (section 154) End bus lanesign (section 154) End freewaysign (sections 97, 177) End freewaysign (sections 97, 177) End freewaysign (sections 97, 177) End freewaysign (sections 97, 177) End keep leftunless overtaking sign (section 130) End school zonesign (section 23) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 365
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 End school zonesign (section 23) End school zonesign (section 23) End school zonesign (section 23) End separatedfootpath sign (section 239) End shared pathsign (section 242) End shared zonesign (section 24) Page 366Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Endshared zone sign (section 24) End speed limitsign (section 21) End tram lanesign (section 155) End tramwaysign (section 155A) End transit lanesign (section 156) End trucks andbuses low gear sign (section 108) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 367
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 End truck lanesign (section 157) Freewaysign (section 177) Freewaysign (section 177) Freewaysign (section 177) Freewaysign (section 177) Freewaysign (section 177) Hand-held stopsign (section 80) Hand-held stopsign (section 80) Page 368Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Hand-held stop sign (section80) Hand-held stop sign (section 80,101) Keep right sign (sections 99,135) Lane control ends sign (section152) Left lane must turn left sign(section 88) Left turn onlysign (section 88) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 369
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 Loading zonesign (section 179) Loading zonesign (section 179) Median turninglane sign (section 86) No bicyclessign (sections 239, 242, 252) No entrysign (section 100) No entrysign (section 100) Page 370Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Noentry sign (section 100) No entrysign (section 100) No left turnsign (Standard sign) (section 91) No left turnsign (Variable illuminated message sign) (section91) No overtaking on bridge sign(section 94) No parking sign(for a length of road) (section 168) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 371
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 No parking sign(for a length of road) No parking sign (for a length ofroad) (section 168) (section168) No parking sign (for a length of road)(section 168) No parking sign(for an area) (section 168) No parking sign(for an area) (section 168) No parking sign(for an area) (section 168) Page 372Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Nopersonal mobility devices sign (section244H) No personal mobility devices sign(section 244H) No right turnsign (Standard sign) (section 91) No right turnsign (Variable illuminated message sign) (section91) No right turn sign (section91) No stopping sign (for a length ofroad) (section 167) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 373
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 No stopping sign(for a length of road) No stopping sign (for a length ofroad) (section 167) (section167) No stopping sign (for an area)(section 167) No stoppingsign (section 167) No U-turn sign(Standard sign) (section 39) No U-turn sign(Variable illuminated message sign) (section39) Page 374 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Nowheeled recreational devices or toys No wheeled recreationaldevices or toys sign sign(section 240A) (section240A) One-way sign (section98) Pedestrians may cross diagonally sign(sections 230, 234) Permissiveparking sign (for a length of Permissiveparking sign (for a length of road)road) (section204) (section 204) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 375
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 Permissiveparking sign (for a length of Permissiveparking sign (for a length of road)road) (section204) (section 204) Permissiveparking sign (for an area) Permissive parking sign (for anarea) (section 204) (section204) Permissive parking sign (for an area)Permissive parking sign (for an area)(section 204) (section204) Page 376 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Permit zone sign (section185) Permit zone sign (section185) Right lane must turn right sign(section 89) Right turn onlysign (section 89) Right turn onlysign (section 89) Road accesssign (sections 97, 229) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 377
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 School zonesign (section 23) School zonesign (section 23) School zonesign (section 23) School zonesign (section 23) School zonesign (section 23) School zonesign (section 23) Page 378Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3School zone sign (section23) School zone sign (section23) School zone sign (section23) School zone sign (section23) Separated footpath sign (sections 239,252) Shared path sign (sections 242,252) Current as at 7 April 2014Page379
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 Shared zonesign (section 24) Shared zonesign (section 24) Stop here on redsignal sign (section 56) Taxi zonesign (section 182) Taxi zonesign (section 182) Taxi zonesign (section 182) Page 380Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Taxizone sign (section 182) Tram lanesign (section 155) Tram lanesign (section 155) Tramwaysign (section 155A) Transit lanesign (section 156) Transit lanesign (section 156) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 381
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3 Truck arresterbed (section 101A) Truck arresterbed (section 101A) TRUCKARRESTER BEDTRUCK ARRESTERBED Trucks and buses low gear sign(section 108) Trucks and buseslow gear sign (section 108) Trucks mustenter sign (section 105) Trucks mustenter sign (section 105) Trucks use leftlane sign (section 159) Truck zonesign (section 180) Page 382Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 3Two-way sign (sections 98,132, 136) Works zone sign (section181) Current as at 7 April 2014Page383
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 4 Schedule 4Symbols and traffic-relateditems sections 314, 316and 320 Do not overtake turning vehicle sign(sections 28, 32, 143) Do not overtaketurning vehicle sign (sections 28, 32, 143)Firehydrant indicator (example) (section194) Fire hydrant indicator (example)(section 194) Fire plugindicator (example) (section 194) Give way tobuses sign (section 77) Page 384Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 4Green bicycle symbol (section260) Green pedestrian symbol (section231) People with disabilities symbol(section 203) People withdisabilities symbol (section 203) Red bicyclesymbol (section 260) Red pedestriansymbol (section 231) White Blight (section 285) White Tlight (section 278) Current as at 7April 2014 Page 385
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 4 Yellow bicyclesymbol (section 261) Page 386Current as at 7 April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 5Schedule 5 Dictionary section 4approved bicycle helmet means a helmetthat complies with— (a) AS 2063; or (b)AS/NZS 2063; or (c)another standard the chief executiveconsiders is at least equal to a standard mentioned inparagraph (a) or (b). approved seatbeltmeans aseatbelt complyingwith thevehicle standards for seatbelts under theStandards and Safety Regulation. areaincludes— (a)abridge; and (b) a network of roads; and(c) a slip lane. AS/NZSmeans astandard publishedjointly byStandards Australia andStandards New Zealand. bicycle crossing means an area ofa road— (a) at a place with bicycle crossinglights that would face the rider of a bicycle crossing theroad and traffic lights that would face a vehicle driving onthe road; and (b) indicated bya different roadsurface, orbetween 2parallel continuous or broken lines, or rowsof studs or markers, on the road surface substantiallyfrom 1 side of the road to the other. Example of adifferent road surface — The area of roadcould be indicated by brick paving across a road.bicycle crossing light means a green,yellow or red bicycle crossing light. Current as at 7April 2014 Page 387
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 5 bicyclecrossing lightsmeans adevice designedto show abicycle crossing light, or 2 or more bicyclecrossing lights at different times. bicyclelane see section 153. bicyclepath see section 239. bicycle pathroad marking see section 239. bicycle storagearea means— (a)an area ofa road beforean intersection withtraffic lights—(i) that has painted on it 1 or morebicycle symbols; and (ii) that is between2 parallel stop lines, regardless of whether thelines are of equal length; but (b)doesnot include any stop line. bicycle symbol means a symbolconsisting of a picture of a bicycle.bicycle trailer see section257(2). B light means a red,white or yellow B light. B lights means a devicedesigned to show a B light, or 2 or more B lights atdifferent times. built-up area , in relation toa length of road, means an area in which either ofthe following is present for a distance of at least 500m or,if the length of road is shorter than 500m, for the wholeroad— (a) buildings, not over 100m apart, onland next to the road; (b) street lightsnot over 100m apart. bus means a motorvehicle built mainly to carry people that seats over 12adults (including the driver). bus laneseesection 154. bus zone see section183. Page 388 Current as at 7April 2014
Transport Operations (Road UseManagement—Road Rules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 5centre of the road , for a driveron a two-way road, means the far right sideof the part of the road used by traffic travellinginthe same direction as the driver. changesdirection see section 45. children’scrossing see section 80. continuingroad , for a T-intersection, means the road(except a road-related area)that meetsthe terminating roadat the T-intersection. crashincludes— (a)acollision between 2 or more vehicles; or (b)another accident or incident involving avehicle in which a person is killed or injured, property isdamaged, or an animal in someone’s charge is killed orinjured. crossing means—(a) a bicycle crossing; or(b) a children’s crossing; or(c) a level crossing; or(d) a marked foot crossing; or(e) a pedestrian crossing.dividing linemeans aroad markingformed bya line, or2 parallel lines,whether brokenor continuous, designedto indicate the parts of the road to beused by vehicles travelling in oppositedirections. dividing strip means an area orstructure that divides a road lengthways, butdoes not include a nature strip, bicycle path, footpath orshared path. do not overtake turning vehicle signmeans a sign shown in a diagram inschedule 4 as a Do not overtake turning vehicle sign.drive includes be incontrol of. driver see sections 16and 19. Current as at 7 April 2014Page389
Transport Operations (Road Use Management—RoadRules) Regulation 2009 Schedule 5 driver’svehicle for a driver, means the vehicle beingdriven by the driver. edge line,for a road, means a line marked along the road at ornear thefar left orfar right sideof the road(except anyroad-related area of the road).emergency stopping lane see section95. emergency vehicle means a motorvehicle driven by a person who is— (a)anemergency worker; and (b) driving thevehicle in the course of performing duties as an emergencyworker. emergency worker means—(a) an officer of the Queensland AmbulanceService or an ambulance service of another State;or (b) a fire officer under theFireand Rescue Service Act 1990 or a fire andrescue service of another State; or (c)anofficer or employee of another entity with the writtenpermission of the commissioner.endbicycle path road marking see section 239. end separatedfootpath road marking see section 239. enter, anintersection or crossing, for the driver of a vehicle oratrain, means enter the intersection or crossing with anypart of the vehicle or train. freewayseesection 177. front fog light see section217. give way , for a driveror pedestrian, means— (a) if the driver orpedestrian is stopped—remain stationary until it is safeto proceed; or (b) in any other case—slow down and, ifnecessary, stop to avoid a collision. Page 390Current as at 7 April 2014